UA5000 Hardware Description Manual

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1 .........................................................................................
1.1 About the UA5000 1-1 ..................................................................................

1.2 Configuration of the UA5000 1-2 ..................................................................
Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames 2-1 ....................................................
2.1 HABA Frame 2-1 ..........................................................................................
2.1.1 Overview 2-1 ........................................................................................
2.1.2 Layout 2-1 ............................................................................................
2.1.3 External Port 2-3 ..................................................................................
2.2 HABB Frame 2-4 ..........................................................................................
2.2.1 Overview 2-4 ........................................................................................
2.2.2 Layout 2-5 ............................................................................................
2.2.3 External Port 2-6 ..................................................................................
2.3 HABD Frame 2-7 ..........................................................................................
2.3.1 Overview 2-7 ........................................................................................
2.3.2 Layout 2-8 ............................................................................................
2.3.3 External Port 2-9 ..................................................................................
2.4 HABE Frame 2-12 ..........................................................................................
2.4.1 Overview 2-12 ........................................................................................
2.4.2 Layout 2-12 ............................................................................................
2.4.3 External Port 2-13 ..................................................................................
2.5 HABF Frame 2-15 ..........................................................................................
2.5.1 Overview 2-15 ........................................................................................
2.5.2 Layout 2-15 ............................................................................................
2.5.3 External Port 2-16 ..................................................................................
2.6 HABL Frame 2-18 ...........................................................................................
2.6.1 Overview 2-18 ........................................................................................
2.6.2 Layout 2-19 ............................................................................................
2.6.3 External Port 2-20 ..................................................................................
Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards 3-1 .....................................................................
3.1 About This Chapter 3-1 ................................................................................
3.2 ATM Service Processing Card-H601APMB 3-1 ...........................................
3.2.1 Overview 3-1 ........................................................................................
3.2.2 Front Panel 3-1 ....................................................................................
3.2.3 Subcard 3-3 ..........................................................................................
3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-10 .............................
3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave Frame-H601APSB 3-11 ......................
3.3.1 Overview 3-11 ........................................................................................
3.3.2 Front Panel 3-11 ....................................................................................
3.4 IP Service Processing Card-H601IPMB 3-13 .................................................
3.4.1 Overview 3-13 ........................................................................................
3.4.2 Front Panel 3-14 ....................................................................................
3.4.3 Subcard 3-16 ..........................................................................................
3.5 Packet Voice Processing Card- AG03PVM/
AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB 3-18 .........................................................................
3.5.1 Overview 3-18 ........................................................................................
3.5.2 Front Panel 3-19 ....................................................................................
3.5.3 Jumpers 3-21 .........................................................................................
3.6 Packet Voice Processing Card -H601PVMB/
H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG 3-23 ....................................................
3.6.1 Overview 3-23 ........................................................................................
3.6.2 Front Panel 3-24 ....................................................................................
3.6.3 Jumpers 3-27 .........................................................................................
3.7 V5 Interface Processing Unit-H601PVU8/H601PVU4 3-29 ............................
3.7.1 Overview 3-29 ........................................................................................
3.7.2 Front Panel 3-30 ....................................................................................
3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-33 ............................................................
3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing Card- H601RSU8/ H601RSU4 3-35 ............
3.8.1 Overview 3-35 ........................................................................................
3.8.2 Front Panel 3-36 ....................................................................................
3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-38 ............................................................
3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing Card-H602RSUG ( 2G. SHDSL) 3-41 ..........
3.9.1 Overview 3-41 ........................................................................................
3.9.2 Front Panel 3-41 ....................................................................................
3.10 ATM Port Card-H601AIUB 3-45 ...................................................................
3.10.1 Overview 3-45 ......................................................................................
3.10.2 Front Panel 3-45 ..................................................................................
3.10.3 Subcard 3-47 ........................................................................................
3.10.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-48 ...........................
3.11 16-Port E1 Port Card-H601EDTB 3-50 ........................................................
3.11.1 Overview 3-50 ......................................................................................
3.11.2 Front Panel 3-50 ..................................................................................
3.11.3 Jumpers 3-51 .......................................................................................
3.12 16-Port ADSL Line Card-H601ADLB 3-56 ...................................................
3.12.1 Overview 3-56 ......................................................................................
3.12.2 Front Panel 3-56 ..................................................................................
3.12.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-57 ..........................................................
3.13 16-Port ADSL Line Card-H601ADLF 3-59 ....................................................
3.13.1 Overview 3-59 ......................................................................................
3.13.2 Front Panel 3-59 ..................................................................................
3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card -H602ADMB/ H602ADMC/
H602ADMI 3-62 ....................................................................................................
3.14.1 Overview 3-62 ......................................................................................
3.14.2 Front Panel 3-62 ..................................................................................
3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card-H603ADRB 3-64 ....................................
3.15.1 Overview 3-64 ......................................................................................
3.15.2 Front Panel 3-64 ..................................................................................
3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card-H605ADRB 3-68 ....................................
3.16.1 Overview 3-68 ......................................................................................
3.16.2 Front Panel 3-68 ..................................................................................
3.17 16-Port Analog Line Card-CB36ASL/CB37ASL 3-72 ...................................
3.17.1 Overview 3-72 ......................................................................................
3.17.2 Front Panel 3-73 ..................................................................................
3.18 16-Port Analog Line Card-CB38ASL 3-75 ....................................................
3.18.1 Overview 3-75 ......................................................................................
3.18.2 Front Panel 3-76 ..................................................................................
3.19 32-Port Analog Line Card- CC0HASL/ CC0NASL/CC0RASL 3-78 ..............
3.19.1 Overview 3-78 ......................................................................................
3.19.2 Front Panel 3-79 ..................................................................................
3.20 16-Port Analog Line Card-CC0KASL/CC0MASL 3-81 .................................
3.20.1 Overview 3-81 ......................................................................................
3.20.2 Front Panel 3-82 ..................................................................................
3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port Card-H601ATIA 3-84 ..........................................
3.21.1 Overview 3-84 ......................................................................................
3.21.2 Front Panel 3-85 ..................................................................................
3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port Card - H301CDI/ CC01CDI 3-90 ......
3.22.1 Overview 3-90 ......................................................................................
3.22.2 Front Panel 3-90 ..................................................................................
3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane 3-91 ............................
3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card-H601CSLB 3-93 .....................
3.23.1 Overview 3-93 ......................................................................................
3.23.2 Front Panel 3-93 ..................................................................................
3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card-H601CSLI 3-96 ......................
3.24.1 Overview 3-96 ......................................................................................
3.24.2 Front Panel 3-96 ..................................................................................
3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+Combo Line CardCH602CSMB... 3-99
3.25.1 Overview 3-99 ......................................................................................
3.25.2 Front Panel 3-99 ..................................................................................
3.26 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card -
H603CSMB/ H603CSMC 3-102 .............................................................................
3.26.1 Overview 3-102 ......................................................................................
3.26.2 Front Panel 3-102 ..................................................................................
3.27 32-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card - H603CSRB 3-106 ....
3.27.1 Overview 3-106 ......................................................................................
3.27.2 Front Panel 3-106 ..................................................................................
3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port Card-H601DEHA 3-109 ............................
3.28.1 Overview 3-109 ......................................................................................
3.28.2 Front Panel 3-110 ..................................................................................
3.28.3 DIP Switches 3-110 ................................................................................
3.29 8-Port Digital Line Card-CB02DSL/CB03DSL 3-114 ......................................
3.29.1 Overview 3-114 ......................................................................................
3.29.2 Front Panel 3-114 ..................................................................................
3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line Card-CB05DSL 3-117 .....................................
3.30.1 Overview 3-117 ......................................................................................
3.30.2 Front Panel 3-117 ..................................................................................
3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit Card-H601EAUA 3-120 .....................................
3.31.1 Overview 3-120 ......................................................................................
3.31.2 Front Panel 3-120 ..................................................................................
3.32 2-Port High Speed Line Card-H302HSL 3-123 ..............................................
3.32.1 Overview 3-123 ......................................................................................
3.32.2 Front Panel 3-124 ..................................................................................
3.33 2-Port High Speed Line Card-H303HSL 3-127 ..............................................
3.33.1 Overview 3-127 ......................................................................................
3.33.2 Front Panel 3-127 ..................................................................................
3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 Card-H521SDL 3-132 ......................................
3.34.1 Overview 3-132 ......................................................................................
3.34.2 Front Panel 3-133 ..................................................................................
3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line Card-H601SDLB 3-138 .................................................
3.35.1 Overview 3-138 ......................................................................................
3.35.2 Front Panel 3-138 ..................................................................................
3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line Card-H601SDLT 3-140 ...................................................
3.36.1 Overview 3-140 ......................................................................................
3.36.2 Front Panel 3-141 ..................................................................................
3.37 16-Port VDSL Line Card-H601VDLA 3-143 ...................................................
3.37.1 Overview 3-143 ......................................................................................
3.37.2 Front Panel 3-143 ..................................................................................
3.38 16-Port VDSL Line Card-H601VDLB 3-145 ...................................................
3.38.1 Overview 3-145 ......................................................................................
3.38.2 Front Panel 3-145 ..................................................................................
3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port Card-CB02VFB 3-147 ....................................
3.39.1 Overview 3-147 ......................................................................................
3.39.2 Front Panel 3-147 ..................................................................................
3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port Card-CB03VFB 3-151 ....................
3.40.1 Overview 3-151 ......................................................................................
3.40.2 Front Panel 3-151 ..................................................................................
3.40.3 DIP Switches 3-152 ................................................................................
3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line Card-CB01VMS 3-155 ............................
3.41.1 Overview 3-155 ......................................................................................
3.41.2 Front Panel 3-156 ..................................................................................
3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring Card-H303ESC 3-158 ...............................
3.42.1 Overview 3-158 ......................................................................................
3.42.2 Front Panel 3-159 ..................................................................................
3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring Card-H304ESC 3-161 ...............................
3.43.1 Overview 3-161 ......................................................................................
3.43.2 Front Panel 3-162 ..................................................................................
3.44 Fan Control Card-H601FCB 3-164 .................................................................
3.44.1 Overview 3-164 ......................................................................................
3.44.2 Front Panel 3-164 ..................................................................................
3.44.3 DIP Switches 3-165 ................................................................................
3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring Card-H611PWMA 3-166 ..........................
3.45.1 Overview 3-166 ......................................................................................
3.45.2 Front Panel 3-166 ..................................................................................
3.46 Secondary Power Supply Card-H602PWX0 3-168 ........................................
3.46.1 Overview 3-168 ......................................................................................
3.46.2 Front Panel 3-169 ..................................................................................
3.47 Secondary Power Supply Card-H602PWX2 3-171 ........................................
3.47.1 Overview 3-171 ......................................................................................
3.47.2 Front Panel 3-172 ..................................................................................
3.47.3 Jumpers 3-173 .......................................................................................
3.48 Subscriber Test Card-H601TSSB/H601TSSC 3-175 .....................................
3.48.1 Overview 3-175 ......................................................................................
3.48.2 Front Panel 3-176 ..................................................................................
3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion Card-H601E1TB 3-181 .....................................
3.49.1 Overview 3-181 ......................................................................................
3.49.2 Front Panel 3-181 ..................................................................................
3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion Card-H601E1TF 3-184 ....................................
3.50.1 Overview 3-184 ......................................................................................
3.50.2 Front Panel 3-184 ..................................................................................
3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion Card-H601EFTB 3-185 ....................................
3.51.1 Overview 3-185 ......................................................................................
3.51.2 Front Panel 3-186 ..................................................................................
3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion Card-H601EFTF 3-188 ...............................
3.52.1 Overview 3-188 ......................................................................................
3.52.2 Front Panel 3-188 ..................................................................................
3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access Master
Frame to Extended Frame- H601HLAF 3-190 .......................................................
3.53.1 Overview 3-190 ......................................................................................
3.53.2 Front Panel 3-191 ..................................................................................
3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Extended
Frame - H601HLEF 3-191 ......................................................................................
3.54.1 Overview 3-191 ......................................................................................
3.54.2 Front Panel 3-191 ..................................................................................
3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave Frame -
H601HLSF 3-192 ....................................................................................................
3.55.1 Overview 3-192 ......................................................................................
3.55.2 Front Panel 3-192 ..................................................................................
3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master Frame - H601HWCB 3-192 ....
3.56.1 Overview 3-192 ......................................................................................
3.56.2 Front Panel 3-192 ..................................................................................
3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master Frame - H601HWCF 3-194 ...
3.57.1 Overview 3-194 ......................................................................................
3.57.2 Front Panel 3-194 ..................................................................................
3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave Frame-H601HWTB 3-195 ........
3.58.1 Overview 3-195 ......................................................................................
3.58.2 Front Panel 3-195 ..................................................................................
3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame -
H601HWTF 3-196 ..................................................................................................
3.59.1 Overview 3-196 ......................................................................................
3.59.2 Front Panel 3-196 ..................................................................................
3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion Card-H601RATB 3-197 ...................
3.60.1 Overview 3-197 ......................................................................................
3.60.2 Front Panel 3-198 ..................................................................................
3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion CardCH601RATF............... 3-200
3.61.1 Overview 3-200 ......................................................................................
3.61.2 Front Panel 3-201 ..................................................................................
3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion Card - H601SLTF 3-203 ...........
3.62.1 Overview 3-203 ......................................................................................
3.62.2 Front Panel 3-204 ..................................................................................
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables 4-1 ...........................................
4.2 Trunk Cable 4-1 ............................................................................................
4.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable 4-1 ...............................................................
4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-1 ......
4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-1 ........................
4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-5 ...........
4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-8 ..........................
4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-8 .................................
4.2.7 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-11 ...............................
4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-14 .........................................
4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 4-16 ...............
4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 4-17 ....
4.2.11 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP2 4-21 ................................................................................................
SS42SP2 4-28 ................................................................................................
4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-31 ......
4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-31 .............
4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-33 ...........
4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-35 ......
4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-35 .............
4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-38 ...........
4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable 4-40 ............................................................
4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
APMB 4-40 ......................................................................................................
4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
APMB 4-40 ......................................................................................................
APMB 4-43 ......................................................................................................
4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
DDF 4-46 .........................................................................................................
4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF 4-46 ...................
4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4
to Metro 1000 4-46 ..........................................................................................
4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 4-47 ...
4.3 Subtending Cable 4-47 ...................................................................................
4.3.1 Overview of Subtending Cable 4-47 ......................................................
4.3.2 HW Cable 4-47 .......................................................................................
4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame 4-49 ...................................................
4.3.4 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame 4-51 ............................................
4.4 Subscriber Cable 4-53 ....................................................................................
4.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable 4-53 .......................................................
4.4.2 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable 4-53 ......................................
4.4.3 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable 4-56 ......................................
4.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable 4-59 ..................................................................
4.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable 4-62 .................................................................
4.5 Maintenance Cable 4-64 ................................................................................
4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable 4-64 ....................................................
4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable 4-64 .............................................
4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable 4-65 ...........................................................
4.5.4 Straight Through Cable 4-66 ..................................................................
4.5.5 Cross Over Cable 4-66 ..........................................................................
4.6 Signal Cable 4-67 ...........................................................................................
4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable 4-67 ....................................................................
4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable 4-69 .................................................
4.7 Optical Fiber 4-71 ...........................................................................................
4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type 4-71 ..........................................................................
4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria 4-73 ..................................................................
4.7.3 Optical Port Connector 4-74 ...................................................................
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables 5-1 ............................................
5.2 Trunk Cable 5-1 ............................................................................................
5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable 5-1 ...............................................................
5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 5-10 ...............
5.2.9 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 5-10 ......
SS42SP1 5-14 ................................................................................................
SS42SP2 5-21 ................................................................................................
5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-25 ........................
5.2.14 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-25 ...........
5.2.15 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-27 .........
5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 5-29 ..........................
5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 5-29 ........
5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
SS42SP1 5-30 ................................................................................................
SS42SP1 5-32 ................................................................................................
SS42SP2 5-34 ................................................................................................
SS42SP2 5-36 ................................................................................................
5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable 5-38 ..................................................
5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable 5-41 .................................................................
to APMB 5-41 ..................................................................................................
APMB 5-41 ......................................................................................................
APMB 5-44 ......................................................................................................
5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF 5-47 .............
5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 5-47 ...
Metro 1000 SS42SP1 5-47 .............................................................................
Metro 1000 SS42SP1 5-50 .............................................................................
Metro 1000 SS42SP2 5-52 .............................................................................
Metro 1000 SS42SP2 5-54 .............................................................................
to Metro100 5-56 .............................................................................................
Metro100 5-57 .................................................................................................
Metro100 5-59 .................................................................................................
5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable 5-61 ...............................................................
5.3.1 HW Cable 5-61 .......................................................................................
5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame 5-62 ...................................................
5.4 Subscriber Cable 5-64 ....................................................................................
5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable 5-64 .......................................................
5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable 5-65 ............................................
5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable 5-68 ............................................
5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable 5-71 ..................................................................
5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable 5-74 .................................................................
5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-76 .............................................
5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-76 ...........................................
5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-78 ..........................................
5.5 Maintenance Cable 5-80 ................................................................................
5.6 Overview of Signal Cable 5-80 .......................................................................
5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable 5-81 ...................................................................
5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable 5-82 ....................................................................
5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable 5-82 .....................................................................
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations A-1 ....................................................
Index .................................................................................................................
Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI

UA5000 Universal Access Unit
Hardware Description Manual
V100R009/V100R011



Manual Version
T2-052585-20050820-C-1.B0
Product Version
V100R009/V100R011
BOM 31250285

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com


Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies
Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of
their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual
Release Notes
This manual applies to UA5000 Universal Access Unit V100R009/V100R011.
Related Manuals
The related manuals are listed in the following table.
Manual Content
Technical Manual
It gives an overall description about the UA5000
system.
UA5000 Universal Access
Unit Hardware Description
Manual
It describes the ONU components, and the cards
and cables used in the ONUs.
Operation Manual
The operation manual consists of APM Volume,
IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU Volume.
They cover the service configurations and
maintenance operations of the UA5000 when the
main control card is APM, PVM, IPM or PVU
respectively.
Command Help
The command help consists of APM Volume,
IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU Volume.
They provide all the commands of the UA5000
when the main control card is APM, PVM, IPM or
PVU respectively. The command helps are
contained in the documentation CD only.
Electronic Documentation CD
The CD contains all contents of the whole set of
manuals.

Organization
The manual describes cabinets, service frames, cards and cables of the UA5000
series.
There are five chapters and one appendix in this manual.
Chapter 1 Overview describes the UA5000 cabinet series, and lists the service frames
used in the UA5000.

Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames describes the service frames used in the
UA5000.
Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards describes the cards used in the UA5000.
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables describes the front-access cables
used in the UA5000.
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables describes the rear-access cables
used in the UA5000.
Appendix Acronyms and Abbreviations lists all the abbreviations and acronyms in
this manual.
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
Telecom administrators
Telecom technicians
Installation and maintenance engineers of the UA5000
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

II. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.
Note: Means a complementary description.

Environmental Protection
This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental
protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and
regulations must be observed.
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Table of Contents

i
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 About the UA5000.............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Configuration of the UA5000 ............................................................................................. 1-2
Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames.................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 HABA Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 HABB Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-6
2.3 HABD Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-9
2.4 HABE Frame.................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-13
2.5 HABF Frame.................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.5.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6 HABL Frame .................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-18
2.6.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.6.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-20
Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 About This Chapter ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 ATM Service Processing CardH601APMB...................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.3 Subcard................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-10
3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave FrameH601APSB.............................................. 3-11
3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-11

ii
3.3.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4 IP Service Processing CardH601IPMB ......................................................................... 3-13
3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4.3 Subcard................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.5 Packet Voice Processing CardAG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB....................... 3-18
3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-18
3.5.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-19
3.5.3 Jumpers................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.6 Packet Voice Processing CardH601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG 3-23
3.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-24
3.6.3 Jumpers................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.7 V5 Interface Processing UnitH601PVU8/H601PVU4.................................................... 3-29
3.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-29
3.7.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-30
3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers................................................................................... 3-33
3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing CardH601RSU8/H601RSU4....................................... 3-35
3.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-35
3.8.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-36
3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers................................................................................... 3-38
3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing CardH602RSUG (2G.SHDSL).................................... 3-41
3.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-41
3.9.2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 3-41
3.10 ATM Port CardH601AIUB............................................................................................ 3-45
3.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-45
3.10.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-45
3.10.3 Subcard............................................................................................................... 3-47
3.10.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-48
3.11 16-Port E1 Port CardH601EDTB................................................................................. 3-50
3.11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-50
3.11.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-50
3.11.3 Jumpers............................................................................................................... 3-51
3.12 16-Port ADSL Line CardH601ADLB............................................................................ 3-56
3.12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-56

iii
3.12.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-56
3.12.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers................................................................................. 3-57
3.13 16-Port ADSL Line CardH601ADLF............................................................................ 3-59
3.13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-59
3.13.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-59
3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line CardH602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI ..................... 3-62
3.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-62
3.14.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-62
3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line CardH603ADRB............................................................. 3-64
3.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-64
3.15.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-64
3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line CardH605ADRB............................................................. 3-68
3.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-68
3.16.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-68
3.17 16-Port Analog Line CardCB36ASL/CB37ASL ........................................................... 3-72
3.17.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-72
3.17.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-73
3.18 16-Port Analog Line CardCB38ASL ............................................................................ 3-75
3.18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-75
3.18.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-76
3.19 32-Port Analog Line CardCC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL........................................ 3-78
3.19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-78
3.19.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-79
3.20 16-Port Analog Line CardCC0KASL/CC0MASL.......................................................... 3-81
3.20.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-81
3.20.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-82
3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port CardH601ATIA .................................................................. 3-84
3.21.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-84
3.21.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-85

iv
3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port CardH301CDI/CC01CDI ................................. 3-90
3.22.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-90
3.22.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-90
3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................... 3-91
3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line CardH601CSLB.............................................. 3-93
3.23.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-93
3.23.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-93
3.23.4 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................... 3-94
3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line CardH601CSLI............................................... 3-96
3.24.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-96
3.24.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-96
3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line CardH602CSMB.............................. 3-99
3.25.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-99
3.25.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-99
3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers............................................................................... 3-100
3.25.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-100
3.26 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line CardH603CSMB/H603CSMC ....... 3-102
3.26.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-102
3.26.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-102
3.27 32-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line CardH603CSRB............................ 3-106
3.27.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-106
3.27.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-106
3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port CardH601DEHA.................................................. 3-109
3.28.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-109
3.28.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-110
3.28.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-110
3.29 8-Port Digital Line CardCB02DSL/CB03DSL ............................................................ 3-114
3.29.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-114
3.29.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-114
3.29.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................. 3-116
3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line CardCB05DSL........................................................... 3-117
3.30.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-117
3.30.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-117

v
3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit CardH601EAUA........................................................... 3-120
3.31.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-120
3.31.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-120
3.32 2-Port High Speed Line CardH302HSL..................................................................... 3-123
3.32.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-123
3.32.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-124
3.33 2-Port High Speed Line CardH303HSL..................................................................... 3-127
3.33.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-127
3.33.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-127
3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 CardH521SDL ............................................................ 3-132
3.34.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-132
3.34.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-133
3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line CardH601SDLB ....................................................................... 3-138
3.35.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-138
3.35.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-138
3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line CardH601SDLT.......................................................................... 3-140
3.36.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-140
3.36.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-141
3.37 16-Port VDSL Line CardH601VDLA.......................................................................... 3-143
3.37.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-143
3.37.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-143
3.38 16-Port VDSL Line CardH601VDLB.......................................................................... 3-145
3.38.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-145
3.38.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-145
3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port CardCB02VFB .......................................................... 3-147
3.39.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-147
3.39.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-147
3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port CardCB03VFB .......................................... 3-151

vi
3.40.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-151
3.40.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-151
3.40.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-152
3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line CardCB01VMS.................................................. 3-155
3.41.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-155
3.41.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-156
3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring CardH303ESC..................................................... 3-158
3.42.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-158
3.42.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-159
3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring CardH304ESC..................................................... 3-161
3.43.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-161
3.43.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-162
3.44 Fan Control CardH601FCB ....................................................................................... 3-164
3.44.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-164
3.44.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-164
3.44.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-165
3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring CardH611PWMA ................................................ 3-166
3.45.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-166
3.45.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-166
3.46 Secondary Power Supply CardH602PWX0............................................................... 3-168
3.46.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-168
3.46.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-169
3.47 Secondary Power Supply CardH602PWX2............................................................... 3-171
3.47.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-171
3.47.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-172
3.47.3 Jumpers............................................................................................................. 3-173
3.48 Subscriber Test CardH601TSSB/H601TSSC ........................................................... 3-175
3.48.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-175
3.48.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-176
3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion CardH601E1TB........................................................... 3-181
3.49.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-181
3.49.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-181
3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion CardH601E1TF........................................................... 3-184
3.50.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-184
3.50.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-184

vii
3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion CardH601EFTB........................................................... 3-185
3.51.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-185
3.51.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-186
3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion CardH601EFTF..................................................... 3-188
3.52.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-188
3.52.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-188
3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access Master Frame to Extended
FrameH601HLAF............................................................................................................... 3-190
3.53.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-190
3.53.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-191
3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Extended FrameH601HLEF .... 3-191
3.54.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-191
3.54.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-191
3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave FrameH601HLSF........... 3-192
3.55.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-192
3.55.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-192
3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master FrameH601HWCB............................ 3-192
3.56.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-192
3.56.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-192
3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master FrameH601HWCF............................ 3-194
3.57.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-194
3.57.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-194
3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave FrameH601HWTB .............................. 3-195
3.58.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-195
3.58.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-195
3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended FrameH601HWTF........................ 3-196
3.59.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-196
3.59.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-196
3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion CardH601RATB......................................... 3-197
3.60.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-197
3.60.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-198
3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion CardH601RATF ........................................ 3-200
3.61.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-200
3.61.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-201
3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion CardH601SLTF ................................... 3-203
3.62.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-203
3.62.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-204
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables ........................................................................ 4-1

viii
4.2 Digital Trunk Cable ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.1 Overview of Digital Trunk Cable.............................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ............................... 4-1
4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF................................................. 4-1
4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.................................... 4-5
4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF................................................... 4-8
4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF.......................................................... 4-8
4.2.7 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF...................................................... 4-11
4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF................................................................ 4-14
4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 ...................................... 4-16
4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 .......................... 4-17
4.2.11 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ........................ 4-21
4.2.13 120-Ohm Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2............................. 4-28
4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF............................. 4-31
4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF ................................... 4-31
4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF ................................. 4-33
4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF............................. 4-35
4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF ................................... 4-35
4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF ................................. 4-37
4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable................................................................................... 4-40
4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB................... 4-40
4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.................... 4-40
4.2.23 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.................. 4-43
4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF...................... 4-46
4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF.......................................... 4-46
4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ..... 4-46
4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ......................... 4-46
4.3 Subtending Cable ............................................................................................................ 4-47
4.3.1 HW Cable.............................................................................................................. 4-47
4.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame.......................................................................... 4-48
4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame.................................................................... 4-50
4.4 Subscriber Cable ............................................................................................................. 4-53
4.4.1 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable............................................................. 4-53
4.4.2 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable............................................................. 4-55
4.4.3 ATIA Subscriber Cable.......................................................................................... 4-59
4.4.4 EAUA Subscriber Cable........................................................................................ 4-61
4.5 Maintenance Cable.......................................................................................................... 4-63
4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable ........................................................................... 4-63
4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.................................................................... 4-64
4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable................................................................................... 4-64
4.5.4 Straight Through Cable......................................................................................... 4-65

ix
4.5.5 Cross Over Cable.................................................................................................. 4-66
4.6 Signal Cable..................................................................................................................... 4-66
4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable ........................................................................................... 4-66
4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable........................................................................ 4-69
4.7 Optical Fiber..................................................................................................................... 4-70
4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type................................................................................................. 4-70
4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria.......................................................................................... 4-72
4.7.3 Optical Port Connector.......................................................................................... 4-73
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables.......................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Trunk Cable ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF........................................................ 5-4
5.2.7 120-ohm E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF........................................................ 5-9
5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 ...................................... 5-10
5.2.9 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 ............................ 5-10
5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ............................................... 5-25
5.2.14 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.................................. 5-25
5.2.15 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF................................ 5-27
5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF................................................. 5-29
5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000............................... 5-29
5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1..................... 5-30
5.2.19 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1................... 5-32
5.2.20 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2..................... 5-34
5.2.21 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2................... 5-36
5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable......................................................................... 5-38
5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable ........................................................................................ 5-41
5.2.24 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB ............. 5-41
5.2.25 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.................... 5-41
5.2.26 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.................. 5-44
5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF .................................... 5-47
5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ......................... 5-47
5.2.29 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-47
5.2.30 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
........................................................................................................................................ 5-50

x
5.2.31 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP25-52
5.2.32 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2
........................................................................................................................................ 5-54
5.2.33 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ........ 5-56
5.2.34 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ............... 5-57
5.2.35 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ............. 5-59
5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable ........................................................................................ 5-61
5.3.1 HW Cable.............................................................................................................. 5-61
5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame.......................................................................... 5-62
5.4 Subscriber Cable ............................................................................................................. 5-64
5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable............................................................................... 5-64
5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable................................................................... 5-65
5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable................................................................... 5-68
5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable.......................................................................................... 5-71
5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable........................................................................................ 5-74
5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable .................................................................... 5-76
5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable.................................................................. 5-76
5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable................................................................. 5-78
5.5 Maintenance Cable.......................................................................................................... 5-80
5.6 Overview of Signal Cable ................................................................................................ 5-80
5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable........................................................................................... 5-81
5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable ........................................................................................... 5-82
5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable............................................................................................ 5-82
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................A-1
Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

UA5000 Universal Access Unit List of Figures

xi
List of Figures
Figure 11 UA5000 in the overall solution............................................................................. 1-1
Figure 12 UA5000 series ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 21 HABA frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-2
Figure 22 Ports on the HABA backplane ............................................................................. 2-3
Figure 23 HABB frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-5
Figure 24 Ports on the HABB backplane ............................................................................. 2-6
Figure 25 HABD frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-8
Figure 26 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame....................................... 2-9
Figure 27 Power supply ports on the HABD frame............................................................ 2-11
Figure 28 HABE frame layout ............................................................................................ 2-13
Figure 29 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame..................................... 2-13
Figure 210 Power supply ports on the HABE frame.......................................................... 2-15
Figure 211 HABF frame layout........................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 212 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame ................................... 2-17
Figure 213 Power supply ports on the HABF frame .......................................................... 2-18
Figure 214 HABL frame layout........................................................................................... 2-20
Figure 215 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame.................................... 2-21
Figure 31 Front panel of the H601APMB card..................................................................... 3-2
Figure 32 Subcards supported by the H601APMB board.................................................... 3-4
Figure 33 Pin assignment on the H601APMB card ........................................................... 3-10
Figure 34 Front panel of the H601APSB card ................................................................... 3-12
Figure 35 Buses and ports provided by the IPMB card ..................................................... 3-14
Figure 36 Front panel of the H601IPMB card.................................................................... 3-15
Figure 37 Pin assignment on the H601IPMB card............................................................. 3-18
Figure 38 Front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card....................... 3-19
Figure 39 Layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.............................. 3-21
Figure 310 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card ............................................................... 3-23
Figure 311 Front panel of the H601PVMB card................................................................. 3-24
Figure 312 Front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card3-25
Figure 313 Layout of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card..... 3-27

xii
H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card ........................................ 3-29
Figure 315 Front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards.............................. 3-30
Figure 316 Layout of the H601PVU8 card......................................................................... 3-33
Figure 317 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVU8 card............................ 3-35
Figure 318 Front panel of H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.................................................... 3-36
Figure 31............................................................................................................................ 3-37
Figure 31............................................................................................................................ 3-37
Figure 31............................................................................................................................ 3-37
Figure 319 Layout of the H601RSU8 card......................................................................... 3-39
Figure 320 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601RSU8 card ........................... 3-40
Figure 321 Front panel of the H602RSUG card ................................................................ 3-42
Figure 322 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602RSUG card........................... 3-44
Figure 323 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602RSUG card ........................... 3-45
Figure 324 Front panel of the H601AIUB card .................................................................. 3-46
Figure 325 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601AIUB card............................. 3-49
Figure 326 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601AIUB card ............................. 3-50
Figure 327 Front panel of the H601EDTB card ................................................................. 3-51
Figure 328 Layout of the H601EDTB card......................................................................... 3-52
Figure 329 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (upper HEADER) .............................. 3-55
Figure 330 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (lower HEADER)............................... 3-56
Figure 331 Layout of the H601ADLB card......................................................................... 3-57
Figure 332 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLB card............................ 3-58
Figure 333 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLB card ............................ 3-59
Figure 334 Layout of the H601ADLF card......................................................................... 3-60
Figure 335 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLF card............................ 3-61
Figure 336 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLF card ............................ 3-62
Figure 337 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI
card ............................................................................................................................... 3-63
Figure 338 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI
card ............................................................................................................................... 3-64
Figure 339 Front panel of the H603ADRB card................................................................. 3-65
Figure 340 Layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card ................................................ 3-66
Figure 341 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603ADRB card........................... 3-67
Figure 342 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603ADRB card............................ 3-68

xiii
Figure 343 Front panel of the H605ADRB card................................................................. 3-69
Figure 344 Layout of the H605ADRB card ........................................................................ 3-70
Figure 345 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H605ADRB card........................... 3-71
Figure 346 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H605ADRB card............................ 3-72
Figure 347 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane
(upper HEADER)........................................................................................................... 3-74
Figure 348 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane (lower
HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-75
Figure 349 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane(upper HEADER)
....................................................................................................................................... 3-77
Figure 350 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER)
....................................................................................................................................... 3-78
Figure 351 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card
....................................................................................................................................... 3-80
Figure 352 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card3-81
Figure 353 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane
(upper HEADER)........................................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 354 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane
(lower HEADER) ........................................................................................................... 3-84
Figure 355 Front panel of the H601ATIA card ................................................................... 3-85
Figure 356 Layout of the H601ATIA card........................................................................... 3-86
Figure 357 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ATIA card ............................. 3-88
Figure 358 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ATIA card.............................. 3-89
Figure 359 Front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card .................................................... 3-90
Figure 360 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card .............. 3-92
Figure 361 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card............... 3-92
Figure 362 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-95
Figure 363 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-96
Figure 364 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)
....................................................................................................................................... 3-98
Figure 365 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)
....................................................................................................................................... 3-99
Figure 366 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (upper HEADER)3-101
Figure 367 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (lower HEADER)3-102

xiv
Figure 368 Jumpers of the H603CSMC card................................................................... 3-103
Figure 369 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card .... 3-105
Figure 370 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CMSC card..... 3-106
Figure 371 Layout of the H603CSRB card ...................................................................... 3-107
Figure 372 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSRB card......................... 3-108
Figure 373 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSRB card.......................... 3-109
Figure 374 Layout of the H601DEHA card ...................................................................... 3-110
Figure 375 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601DEHA card ......................... 3-113
Figure 376 Signal definition of lower HEADER on the H601DEHA card......................... 3-113
Figure 377 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card ................................................ 3-115
Figure 378 Pin assignment of upper HEADER of the DSL card...................................... 3-116
Figure 379 Front panel of the CB05DSL card.................................................................. 3-118
Figure 380 Pin assignment between the CB05DSL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)
..................................................................................................................................... 3-119
Figure 381 Front panel of the H601EAUA card ............................................................... 3-120
Figure 382 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601EAUA card ......................... 3-122
Figure 383 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601EAUA card.......................... 3-123
Figure 384 Front panel of the H302HSL card.................................................................. 3-124
Figure 385 Layout of the H302HSL card ......................................................................... 3-125
Figure 386 Front panel of the H303HSL card.................................................................. 3-128
Figure 387 Layout of the H303HSL card ......................................................................... 3-129
Figure 388 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H303HSL card............................ 3-131
Figure 389 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H303HSL card............................. 3-132
Figure 390 Front panel of the H521SDL card.................................................................. 3-133
Figure 391 Layout of the H521SDL card ......................................................................... 3-135
Figure 392 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H521SDL card............................ 3-137
Figure 393 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H521SDL card............................. 3-138
Figure 394 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-139
Figure 395 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-140
Figure 396 Front panel of the H601SDLT card................................................................ 3-141
Figure 397 Pin assignment of the H601SDLT card on the lower HEADER..................... 3-143
Figure 398 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA card.......................... 3-144
Figure 399 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA card .......................... 3-145

xv
Figure 3100 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLB card........................ 3-146
Figure 3101 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLB card ........................ 3-147
Figure 3102 Layout of the CB02VFB card....................................................................... 3-148
Figure 3103 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CB02VFB.................................. 3-150
Figure 3104 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CB02VFB.................................. 3-151
Figure 3105 Layout of the CB03VFB card....................................................................... 3-152
Figure 3106 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-154
Figure 3107 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-155
Figure 3108 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (upper
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-157
Figure 3109 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (lower
HEADER) .................................................................................................................... 3-158
Figure 3110 Front panel of the H303ESC card................................................................ 3-159
Figure 3111 Layout of the H303ESC ............................................................................... 3-160
Figure 3112 Front panel of the H304ESC card................................................................ 3-162
Figure 3113 Layout of the H304ESC card....................................................................... 3-163
Figure 3114 Front panel of the H601FCB card................................................................ 3-165
Figure 3115 Layout of the H601FCB card ....................................................................... 3-165
Figure 3116 Front panel of the H611PWMA card ............................................................ 3-167
Figure 3117 Front panel of the H602PWX0 card............................................................. 3-169
Figure 3118 Layout of the H602PWX0 card .................................................................... 3-171
Figure 3119 Front panel of the H602PWX2 card............................................................. 3-172
Figure 3120 Layout of the H602PWX2 card.................................................................... 3-174
Figure 3121 Front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC card (right) .. 3-176
Figure 3122 Pin assignment of three ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC
card ............................................................................................................................. 3-177
Figure 3123 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card .... 3-179
Figure 3124 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card..... 3-180
Figure 3125 Definition of J3 and J4 on the front panel of the card.................................. 3-182
Figure 3126 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J1)....... 3-183
Figure 3127 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J2)....... 3-183
Figure 3128 Front panel of the H601E1TF card.............................................................. 3-184
Figure 3129 Definition of the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card.................. 3-186

xvi
Figure 3130 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J1)....... 3-187
Figure 3131 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J2)....... 3-188
Figure 3132 Front panel of the H601EFTF card.............................................................. 3-189
Figure 3133 Front panel of the H601HLAF card.............................................................. 3-191
Figure 3134 Front panel of the H601HLEF card.............................................................. 3-191
Figure 3135 Front panel of the H601HLSF card.............................................................. 3-192
Figure 3136 Front panel of the H601HWCB card............................................................ 3-193
Figure 3137 Front panel of the H601HWCF card............................................................ 3-194
Figure 3138 Front panel of the H601HWTF card ............................................................ 3-196
Figure 3139 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card.......................... 3-198
Figure 3140 Pin assignment of connector J1 .................................................................. 3-199
Figure 3141 Pin assignment of connector J2 .................................................................. 3-200
Figure 3142 Ports on the front panel of the H601RATF card .......................................... 3-202
Figure 3143 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATF card.......................... 3-203
Figure 3144 Front panel of the H601SLTF card .............................................................. 3-204
Figure 41 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF .............. 4-2
Figure 42 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ..................... 4-5
Figure 43 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF .................................. 4-8
Figure 44 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.............................. 4-11
Figure 45 Outline of the 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF........................... 4-15
Figure 46 Outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable......................................... 4-15
Figure 47 Outline of the cable to the DDF ......................................................................... 4-16
Figure 48 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1..... 4-17
Figure 49 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1... 4-21
Figure 410 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2........ 4-25
Figure 411 Outline of the 120-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ...... 4-28
Figure 412 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF............ 4-31
Figure 413 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.......... 4-33
Figure 414 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF............ 4-35
Figure 415 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.......... 4-38
Figure 416 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB4-40
Figure 418 Outline of the HW cable................................................................................... 4-47
Figure 419 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame................................................. 4-48

xvii
Figure 420 Outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame. ......................................... 4-50
Figure 421 Outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable................................... 4-54
Figure 422 Outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable................................... 4-56
Figure 423 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable................................................................ 4-59
Figure 424 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable ............................................................. 4-61
Figure 425 Outline of the local maintenance cable............................................................ 4-64
Figure 426 Outline of the straight through cable................................................................ 4-65
Figure 427 Outline of the cross over cable........................................................................ 4-66
Figure 428 Outline of the test and alarm cable.................................................................. 4-67
Figure 429 Outline of the test and alarm subtending cable............................................... 4-69
Figure 52 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................................ 5-5
Figure 54 Outline of the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................................ 5-9
Figure 56 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42 SP1.. 5-15
Figure 58 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2... 5-22
Figure 59 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.................. 5-25
Figure 510 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ........ 5-27
Figure 511 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-30
Figure 515 Outline of the IPMB service subtending cable................................................. 5-38
Figure 518 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-48
1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-50
1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-52
Figure 521 Outline of the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-55

xviii
Figure 522 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro100 ....................................................................................................................... 5-57
Metro100 ....................................................................................................................... 5-59
Figure 524 Outline of the HW cable................................................................................... 5-61
Figure 525 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame................................................. 5-63
Figure 526 Outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable. ........................................ 5-65
Figure 527 Outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable. ........................................ 5-68
Figure 528 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable................................................................ 5-71
Figure 529 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable ............................................................. 5-74
Figure 530 Outline of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable......................................... 5-77
Figure 531 Outline of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable....................................... 5-78
Figure 532 Outline of the ESC monitoring cable ............................................................... 5-81
Figure 533 Outline of the fan monitoring cable.................................................................. 5-82

UA5000 Universal Access Unit List of Tables

xix
List of Tables
Table 11 Service frames used in the UA5000 series ........................................................... 1-2
Table 21 Types of cards in the HABA frame......................................................................... 2-1
Table 22 Description of the ports on the HABA backplane .................................................. 2-4
Table 23 Types of cards in the HABB frame ........................................................................ 2-5
Table 24 Description of the ports on the HABB backplane. ................................................. 2-7
Table 25 Types of cards in the HABD frame ........................................................................ 2-8
Table 26 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABD frame................................. 2-9
Table 27 Description of power supply ports on the HABD frame....................................... 2-11
Table 28 Types of cards in the HABE frame ...................................................................... 2-12
Table 29 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABE frame ............................... 2-14
Table 210 Description of power supply ports on the HABE frame ..................................... 2-15
Table 211 Types of cards in the HABF frame..................................................................... 2-15
Table 212 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABF frame ............................. 2-17
Table 213 Description of the power supply ports on the HABF frame ............................... 2-18
Table 214 Types of cards in the HABL frame..................................................................... 2-19
Table 215 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABL frame.............................. 2-21
Table 31 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card ..................... 3-2
Table 32 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB card3-3
Table 33 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB card (I) ............................ 3-5
Table 34 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (II) ......................... 3-5
Table 35 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (III) ........................ 3-6
Table 36 lists the subcards near the front panel. .................................................................. 3-8
Table 36 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (IV)........................ 3-8
Table 37 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (V)......................... 3-8
Table 38 DIP switches S1 and S4 of the H601CESA card .................................................. 3-9
Table 39 DIP switches S2 and S3 of the H601CESA card .................................................. 3-9
Table 310 DIP switches S1, S2 and S4 of the H601E8IA card............................................ 3-9
Table 311 DIP switches S3 and S5 of the H601E8IA card ................................................ 3-10
Table 312 Pin assignment on the H601APMB backplane ................................................. 3-11
Table 313 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card.................. 3-12

xx
Table 314 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card................... 3-15
Table 315 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB card3-16
Table 316 Subcards supported by the H601IPMB card..................................................... 3-16
Table 317 Pin assignment on J3 of the H601IPMB backplane.......................................... 3-18
Table 318 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the
Table 319 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the
Table 320 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J13................................................. 3-21
Table 321 Description of the LEDS on the front panel of the
Table 322 Description of the ports and the button on the front panel of the
Table 323 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J7 on the
Table 324 Descriptions of the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the
H601PVU4 cards........................................................................................................... 3-31
Table 325 Description of the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the
H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card ......................................................................................... 3-32
Table 326 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card........................... 3-33
Table 327 Settings and meanings of jumpers J14 and J16............................................... 3-34
Table 329 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card3-37
H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card......................................................................................... 3-38
Table 331 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601RSU8 card.............................................. 3-38
Table 334 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card ................. 3-42
Table 335 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG card3-43
Table 336 Description of characters in the following figures.............................................. 3-43
Table 337 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card ................... 3-46
Table 338 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB card3-47
Table 339 Subcards on the H601AIUB card...................................................................... 3-47
Table 340 Description of DIP switches of the H601E8IA subcard ..................................... 3-48
Table 341 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card.................. 3-51

xxi
Table 342 Settings of the jumpers on the H601EDTB card............................................... 3-52
Table 343 Relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1 signals................ 3-53
Table 344 Relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals.................................. 3-53
Table 345 Definition of pins of J203................................................................................... 3-54
Table 346 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLB card.................... 3-57
Table 347 Settings of DIP switch of the H601ADLB card .................................................. 3-57
Table 348 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card .................... 3-60
Table 349 Settings of jumper of the H601ADLF card ........................................................ 3-60
Table 350 Description of the LED on the front panel of the
H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card .................................................................... 3-63
Table 351 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card ................... 3-65
Table 352 Settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card.................................................. 3-66
Table 353 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card ................... 3-69
Table 354 Settings of jumper of the H605ADRB card........................................................ 3-70
Table 355 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card ..... 3-73
Table 356 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB38ASL card ...................... 3-76
Table 357 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL
card ............................................................................................................................... 3-79
Table 358 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card.... 3-82
Table 359 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card.................... 3-85
Table 360 Settings of DIP switch SW1............................................................................... 3-87
Table 361 Settings of DIP switch SW2............................................................................... 3-87
Table 362 Settings of DIP switches SW3SW14............................................................... 3-87
Table 363 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA card................................................ 3-89
Table 364 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card..... 3-91
Table 365 Description of front panel of the H601CSLB card............................................. 3-93
Table 366 Jumper settings of the H601CSLB card............................................................ 3-94
Table 367 Description of the front panel of the H601CSLI card ....................................... 3-96
Table 368 Jumper settings of the H601CSLI card ............................................................. 3-97
Table 369 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card................. 3-100
Table 370 Jumper settings of the H602CSMB/H602CSMC card .................................... 3-100
Table 371 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card3-103
Table 372 Settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card ................................................... 3-104
Table 373 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card ................. 3-107

xxii
Table 374 Settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card.................................. 3-107
Table 375 Description of the LED ON the front panel of the H601DEHA card ................ 3-110
Table 376 Settings and meanings of DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6...........................3-111
Table 377 Settings of DIP switches S3 and S4.................................................................3-111
Table 378 Settings of DIP switch S8................................................................................ 3-112
Table 379 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card . 3-115
Table 380 describes the details on the front panel of the CB05DSL card. ....................... 3-118
Table 380 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB05DSL card .................. 3-118
Table 381 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card................ 3-121
Table 382 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card................... 3-125
Table 383 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card......................... 3-126
Table 384 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card................... 3-128
Table 385 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL card3-129
Table 386 Settings of DIP switches on the H303HSL card.............................................. 3-130
Table 387 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card................... 3-133
Table 388 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL card3-134
Table 389 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL card............................................... 3-135
Table 390 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card.................. 3-139
Table 391 Description of the front panel of the H601SDLT card...................................... 3-142
Table 392 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT card3-142
Table 393 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card .................. 3-143
Table 394 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card.................. 3-146
Table 395 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB02VFB card.................... 3-148
Table 396 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card .............................................. 3-148
Table 397 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card.................... 3-151
Table 398 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card .............................................. 3-152
Table 399 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card ................... 3-156
Table 3100 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card.................. 3-159
Table 3101 Description of the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card............... 3-159
Table 3102 Settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card .................................................... 3-160
Table 3103 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC card.......................................... 3-161
Table 3104 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC card.......................................... 3-161
Table 3105 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card.................. 3-162

xxiii
Table 3106 Description of the switch and the button on the front panel of the H304ESC card
..................................................................................................................................... 3-162
Table 3107 Settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card ............................................ 3-163
Table 3108 Settings of jumpers on the H304ESC card ................................................... 3-164
Table 3109 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card .................. 3-165
Table 3110 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 ........................................ 3-165
Table 3111 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8 ......................................... 3-166
Table 3112 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8............................... 3-166
Table 3113 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card............. 3-167
Table 3114 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H611PWMA card
..................................................................................................................................... 3-168
Table 3115 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card ............. 3-170
Table 3116 Description of the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card ........ 3-170
Table 3117 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX0 card................................................. 3-171
Table 3118 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card ............. 3-173
Table 3119 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card................................................. 3-175
Table 3120 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card3-176
Table 3121 Description of the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card3-177
Table 3122 Description of pins of three ports on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card......... 3-177
Table 3123 Description of pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card .............. 3-180
Table 3124 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card.......................... 3-184
Table 3125 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card.......................... 3-189
Table 3126 Description of the front panel of the H601HWCB card ................................. 3-193
Table 3127 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card ................................ 3-194
Table 3128 Description of the port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card................ 3-196
Table 3129 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card................................. 3-197
Table 3130 Pins on the H601RATB card ......................................................................... 3-200
Table 3131 Pins on the H601RATF card.......................................................................... 3-203
Table 3132 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card .......................... 3-204
Table 41 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF................ 4-2
Table 42 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF... 4-2
Table 43 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF....................... 4-5
Table 44 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.......... 4-6
Table 45 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................... 4-8

xxiv
Table 46 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF....................... 4-9
Table 47 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................................ 4-12
Table 48 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................... 4-12
Table 49 Labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable .......................................... 4-15
Table 410 Labels on the cable to the DDF......................................................................... 4-16
Table 411 Pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF ................................................. 4-16
Table 412 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 .... 4-17
Table 413 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
....................................................................................................................................... 4-18
Table 414 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 .. 4-21
Table 415 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 4-22
....................................................................................................................................... 4-25
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 4-29
Table 420 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I) ......... 4-32
Table 421 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II) ........ 4-32
Table 422 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)4-32
Table 423 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)4-33
Table 424 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I) ....... 4-34
Table 425 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II) ...... 4-34
Table 426 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)
....................................................................................................................................... 4-34
Table 427 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)
....................................................................................................................................... 4-35
Table 428 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I) ......... 4-36
Table 429 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II) ........ 4-36
Table 430 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)4-36
Table 431 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)4-37
Table 432 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I) ....... 4-38
Table 433 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II) ...... 4-38

xxv
Table 434 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)
....................................................................................................................................... 4-39
Table 435 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)
....................................................................................................................................... 4-39
Table 436 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
APMB ............................................................................................................................ 4-41
APMB ............................................................................................................................ 4-43
Table 438 Pin assignment of the HW cable ....................................................................... 4-47
Table 439 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for slave frame ........................................... 4-48
Table 440 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for extended frame..................................... 4-50
Table 441 Pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable ....................... 4-54
Table 442 Pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable ....................... 4-56
Table 443 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable .................................................... 4-59
Table 444 Labels on the EAUA subscriber cable............................................................... 4-61
Table 445 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.................................................. 4-62
Table 446 Pin assignment of the maintenance cable......................................................... 4-64
Table 447 Pin assignment of the straight through cable .................................................... 4-65
Table 448 Pin assignment of the cross over cable............................................................. 4-66
Table 449 Label prints on the test and alarm cable ........................................................... 4-67
Table 450 Pin assignment of the test and alarm cable ...................................................... 4-67
Table 451 Label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable......................................... 4-69
Table 452 Pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable.................................... 4-70
Table 453 Optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000................................................ 4-70
Table 454 Common optical connectors.............................................................................. 4-73
Table 52 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF..................... 5-5
Table 53 Labels on the 75-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................... 5-8
Table 55 Labels on the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................. 5-9
Table 56 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................... 5-10
Table 57 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-11
....................................................................................................................................... 5-12

xxvi
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-15
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-15
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 5-19
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 5-19
Table 513 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro
1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-22
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 5-22
Table 515 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to
DDF............................................................................................................................... 5-25
Table 516 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF5-26
Table 517 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB
to DDF........................................................................................................................... 5-27
Table 518 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF5-28
Table 519 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-30
Table 520 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-31
SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-33
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 5-35
SS42SP2....................................................................................................................... 5-37
Table 527 Description of the labels on the IPMB service subtending cable ...................... 5-38
Table 528 Pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable..................................... 5-39
Table 529 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.............................................................................. 5-41
APMB ............................................................................................................................ 5-42

xxvii
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.............................................................................. 5-44
APMB ............................................................................................................................ 5-45
Table 533 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-48
Table 534 Pin assignment of the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP1.................................................................................................... 5-49
Table 535 Labels on the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-50
Metro 1000 SS42SP1.................................................................................................... 5-51
Table 537 Labels on the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-53
Metro 1000 SS42SP2.................................................................................................... 5-53
Table 539 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-55
Metro 1000 SS42SP2.................................................................................................... 5-55
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100........................................................................ 5-57
Metro 100 ...................................................................................................................... 5-57
Table 543 Description of labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100......................................................................... 5-59
Metro100 ....................................................................................................................... 5-59
Table 545 Pin assignment of the HW cable....................................................................... 5-61
Table 546 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame..................................... 5-63
Table 547 Pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable ............................. 5-65
Table 548 Description of the labels on the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable .............. 5-68
Table 549 Pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable ............................. 5-69
Table 550 Description of labels on the ATIA subscriber cable........................................... 5-71
Table 551 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable.................................................... 5-72
Table 552 Description of the labels on the EAUA subscriber cable................................... 5-74
Table 553 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.................................................. 5-75

xxviii
Table 554 Description of labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.................... 5-77
Table 555 Pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable............................. 5-77
Table 556 Description of labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable................... 5-79
Table 557 Pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable ........................... 5-79
Table 558 Description of the labels on the ESC monitoring cable..................................... 5-81
Table 559 Pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable.................................................... 5-81
Table 560 Description of the labels on the fan monitoring cable ....................................... 5-82
Table 561 Pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable ...................................................... 5-82

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 1 Overview

1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
The UA5000 series is the integrated universal access unit for integrated broadband
and narrowband services. Figure 11 shows the UA5000 series in the overall solution.
E1(V5)
FE/GE
STM-1
DDN
ATM
IP
SDH/MSTP/VP Ring
(H.248/MGCP)
ADSL
ADSL2+
VDSL
SHDSL
E1
PSTN
STM-1
Convergence
layer
Access layer
Terminal
equipment
POTS
ISDN
VoIP
V.24
V.35
E1
LAN
(H.248/MGCP)

: UA5000 : SoftSwitch
Figure 11 UA5000 in the overall solution
1.1 About the UA5000
The UA5000 series is the most important Optical Network Unit (ONU). Figure 12
shows the UA5000 series. They provide different capacities and maintenance modes
and can be applied in different scenarios.
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 1 Overview

1-2
512
A
1000
A
F01
A
F02
A
F01A
F
F02A
F
60
A
F01D10
0
F01D50
0
F01D60
0 F01D20
0
F01D100
0
512
A
1000
A
F01
A
F02
A
F01A
F
F02A
F
60
A
F01D10
0
F01D50
0
F01D60
0
Front access
Indoor series Outdoor series
Rear access
F01D100
0
512
1000
A
F01
F02
A
F01A
F
60
A
F01D50
0
F01D60
0
F01D100
0
F01A
F01AF
F01D100
F01D500
Indoor series Outdoor series
F01D1000
F01D200
F02AF
F02A

Figure 12 UA5000 series
The following describes the front access and rear access.
Front access: The cabinet can be placed against the wall. Card insertion/removing,
cabling, maintenance and operation can be done at the front.
Rear access: The cabinet cannot be placed against the wall. Cables are routed at
the rear, while card insertion or removing is conducted at the front.
1.2 Configuration of the UA5000
Table 11 lists the service frames used in the UA5000 series.
Table 11 Service frames used in the UA5000 series
Cabinet type Service frame
F01A HABA (master frame)
F02A HABA (master frame), HABB (extended frame)
F01AF
HABD (master frame), HABE (slave frame), HABF
(extended frame)
F02AF
(extended frame)
F01D100 HABL (master frame)
F01D200 HABD (master frame)
F01D500 HABD (master frame), HABF (extended frame)
F01D1000
(extended frame)

For description of the service frames, see "Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames";
for description of the cards, see "Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards".

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames

2-1
Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames
This chapter introduces service frames of the UA5000.
2.1 HABA Frame
2.1.1 Overview
The HABA frame is the master frame of the rear-access UA5000.
The HABA frame has 36 slots, and its configuration is as follows:
Two secondary power supply cards (PWX) work in the load sharing mode.
Two broadband control cards reside in slots 2 and 3, supporting dual-system hot
backup.
Two narrowband control cards reside in slots 4 and 5, supporting dual-system hot
backup.
The AIUB card can reside in slots 6 and 7 only, and the TSSB or TSSC card can
reside in slot 17 only.
There are 30 slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be
intermixed.
2.1.2 Layout
The HABA frame is 16 U (1 U = 44.45 mm) high. It can hold the following types of cards,
as listed in Table 21.
Table 21 Types of cards in the HABA frame
Type Card
ATM Broadband control card APMB
IP Broadband control card IPMB
Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, and PVM
Remote subscriber unit RSU8 and RSU4
ATM interface card AIUB
Broadband line card
ADLB, ADRB, SDLB, ADLF, ADMB,
ADMC, ADMI, VDLA/VDLB, and
EAUA
Narrowband line card
ASL/A32, DSL, VFB, CDI, SDL, SDLT,
and EDTB
Broadband and narrowband combo line
card
CSMB, CSMC, CSLB, CSRB, and
CSLI

2-2
Type Card
Secondary power supply card PWX
Test card TSSB and TSSC

Figure 21 shows the HABA frame layout.
01 02 00
Fan
P
W
X
x
S
L
x
P
M
B
P
V
x
/
R
S
U
x
P
W
X
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
Cable routing area
x
P
M
B
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
T
S
S
x
/
x
S
L
P
V
x
/
R
S
U
x
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 34 35
Cable routing area

Figure 21 HABA frame layout
In Figure 21,
PWX stands for the secondary power supply card.
xPMB can be either the ATM or IP broadband control card.
AIUB stands for the ATM interface card.
PVx stands for the narrowband control card.
TSSx stands for the test card.
RSUx stands for the remote subscriber unit.
xSL stands for the line card.
The HABA frame uses the H601HABA backplane.


2-3
Note:
The PVx card can start up normally only after the PWX card works normally.
2.1.3 External Port
I. Ports in the cable connecting area
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABA frame through the
ports on the backplane or through relevant conversion cards. Figure 22 shows the
external ports on the HABA backplane.
-48 VDC port of the
upper half frame
-48 VDC port of the
lower half frame
E1/FE port of the
broadband control card
Monitor and alarm ports
Cable connecting area of
the backplane for line cards
LVDS subtending port
Cable connecting area of the backplane for line cards
the backplane for
narrowband control cards

Figure 22 Ports on the HABA backplane
Table 22 describes the ports on the HABA backplane.

2-4
Table 22 Description of the ports on the HABA backplane
Marks in Figure 22 Conversion card Line card
the corresponding
backplane of the
narrowband control card
HWCB
PVU8/PVU4/PVM/RSU
8/RSU4
the corresponding
backplane of the line card
EFTB
E1TB
RATB
EAUA
DEHA/EDTB/AIUB
16-port and 32-port line
cards
E1/FE port of the
Not applicable (NA) NA
LVDS subtending port NA NA
48 VDC port of the upper
half frame
NA NA
48 VDC port of the lower
half frame
NA NA
Monitor and alarm ports NA NA

II. Power supply ports
The HABA frame provides two 48 VDC ports, residing at the back of the backplane, as
shown in Figure 22.
2.2 HABB Frame
2.2.1 Overview
The HABB frame is the slave frame of the rear-access UA5000, working under the
control of the HABA frame.
The HABB frame has 36 slots, and its configuration is as follows:
Two PWX cards work in the load sharing mode.
backup.
There is no narrowband control card, and narrowband services are controlled by
the narrowband control card in the HABA frame.
intermixed.

2-5
2.2.2 Layout
The HABA frame is 16 U high. It can hold the following types of cards, as listed in
Table 23.
Table 23 Types of cards in the HABB frame
Type Card
ATM broadband control card APSB
Broadband line card
ADLB, ADRB, SDLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC,
ADMI, VDLA/VDLB, and EAUA
ASL/A32, DSL, VFB, CDI, SDL, SDLT, and
EDTB
Broadband and narrowband combo
line card
CSMB, CSMC, CSLB, CSRB, and CSLI

Figure 23 shows the HABB frame layout.
01 02 00
Fan
P
W
X
x
S
L
A
P
S
B
P
W
X
x
S
L
Cable routing area
A
P
S
B
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fan
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 18 34 35
x
S
L
x
S
L
Cable routing area

Figure 23 HABB frame layout
In Figure 23,

2-6
PWX stands for secondary power supply card.
TSSx stands for test card.
APSB stands for broadband control card of the HABB frame
The HABB frame uses the H601HABB backplane.
2.2.3 External Port
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABB frame through the
ports on the backplane or through relevant conversion cards. Figure 24 shows the
external ports on the HABB backplane.
-48 VDC port of the
upper half frame
-48 VDC port of the
lower half frame
E1/FE port of the
Monitor and alarm ports
the backplane for line cards
LVDS subtending port
Cable connecting area of the backplane for line cards

Figure 24 Ports on the HABB backplane
Table 24 describes the ports on the HABB backplane.

2-7
Table 24 Description of the ports on the HABB backplane.
Marks in Figure 24 Conversion card Line card
the corresponding
backplane of the
narrowband control card
HWCB
PVU8/PVU4/PVM/RSU8/
RSU4
the corresponding
backplane of the line card
EFTB
E1TB
RATB
EAUA
DEHA/EDTB/AIUB
16-port and 32-port line
cards
E1/FE port of the
NA NA
LVDS subtending port NA NA
48 VDC port of the upper
frame
NA NA
48 VDC port of the lower
frame
NA NA
Monitor and alarm ports NA NA

The HABB frame provides two 48 VDC ports, residing at the back of the backplane, as
shown in Figure 24.
2.3 HABD Frame
2.3.1 Overview
The HABD frame is the master frame of the front-access UA5000.
The HABD frame provides 18 slots, and its configuration is as follows:
backup.
backup.
intermixed.

2-8
2.3.2 Layout
The HABD frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.
Table 25 Types of cards in the HABD frame
Type Card
Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, PVM
Broadband line card
EDTB
line card

Figure 25 shows the HABD frame layout.
Control and interconnect
cable connecting area
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
x
P
M
B
x
P
M
B
P
W
x
P
W
x
P
V
x
P
V
x
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
T
S
S
B
/
x
S
L
Fan
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Cable routing area
Subscriber cable
connecting area

Figure 25 HABD frame layout
In Figure 25,

2-9
APSB stands for the broadband control card of the HABE frame.
The HABD frame uses the H601HABD backplane.

Note:

2.3.3 External Port
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame through relevant
conversion cards. Figure 26 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
Subscriber cable
connecting area
E
I
T
F
H
L
S
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
S
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
A
F
E
F
T
F
H
W
C
F
H
L
S
F

Figure 26 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame
Table 26 lists the ports provided by the conversion cards.
Table 26 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABD frame
Card Port name Port type Signal description Relative card
HWCF CLK IN RJ-45
The CLK IN port supports the
signal inputs of:
Two channels of 2 MHz
clock
One channel of differential
8 K clock
One channel of differential
clock selection
NA

2-10
STACK
OUT
DB-28
The STACK OUT port
supports the signal outputs of:
Circuit and loop line test
Alarms on the fan frame
ESC serial port
Narrowband and
broadband RS-485 serial
port
Power supply alarm
RS-485 serial port of the
fan
HWOUT0 DB-28
The HWOUT0 port provides
the following signals about the
HABF frame subtended with
the HABD frame:
HW
Frame header of
narrowband clock
Serial port
Broadband clock
In-position
HWOUT1 DB-28
The HWOUT1 provides the
following signals about the
HABE frame:
HW
Frame header of
narrowband clock
Serial port
Broadband clock
In-position

HWOUT2 DB-28
The HWOUT2 port provides
the following signals about the
HABF frame of the HABE
frame:
HW
Frame header of
narrowband clock
Serial port
Broadband clock
In-position

EFTF NA DB-68
The EFTF card provides 16 E1
conversion ports or 8 FE
conversion ports.
APMB/IPMB/
APSB
HLAF NA DB-68
The HLAF card provides one
port for transmitting the high
speed subtending signal
between the HABD and HABF
frame.
NA

2-11
HLSF NA DB-68
The HLSF card provides one
port for transmitting the high
speed subtending signal
between the HABD and HABE
frame.
NA
E1TF NA DB-68
The E1TF card provides 16 E1
conversion ports.
PVM/PVU8/P
VU4/RSU8/R
SU4
SLTF NA DB-68
The SLTF card provides 32
xSL conversion ports or 16 E1
conversion ports.
AIUB/xSL

The HABD frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the fan tray, as shown in
Figure 27.
-48 V power supply port +5 V power supply port
-5 V/Ring current power supply port

Figure 27 Power supply ports on the HABD frame
Table 27 describes the power supply ports on the HABD frame.
Table 27 Description of power supply ports on the HABD frame
Port Function Connection
PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power supply port
Connecting with the inter-frame
+5 V power cable
PWRIO(48V) 48 V power input port
Connecting with the 48 V power
input cable
PWRIO-2(5V/RING)
5 V/Ring current power
supply port
5 V/Ring current cable


2-12
2.4 HABE Frame
2.4.1 Overview
The HABE frame is the slave frame of the front-access UA5000.
The HABE frame provides 18 slots, and its configuration is as follows:
backup.
The TSSB or TSSC card can reside in slot 17 only.
intermixed.
2.4.2 Layout
The HABE frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.
Table 28 Types of cards in the HABE frame
Type Card
ATM Broadband control card APSB
Broadband line card
EDTB
line card

Figure 28 shows the HABE frame layout.

2-13
A
P
S
B
A
P
S
B
P
W
X
P
W
X
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
A
I
U
B
/
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
T
S
S
B
/
x
S
L
Fan
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
x
S
L
x
S
L
Cable routing area
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
Subscriber cable
connecting area

Figure 28 HABE frame layout
In Figure 28,
APSB stands for the broadband control card of the HABE.
xSL stands for the line card
The HABE frame uses the H601HABE backplane.
2.4.3 External Port
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame through relevant
conversion cards. Figure 29 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
H
L
S
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
S
F
H
L
S
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
A
F
H
L
A
F
E
F
T
F
H
W
C
F
/
H
W
T
F
S
L
T
F
Subscriber cable
connecting area

Figure 29 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame
Table 29 lists the ports provided by these conversion cards.

2-14
Table 29 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABE frame
Card Port name Port type Signal description
CLK OUT RJ-45
The CLK OUT supports the signal inputs of:
Differential 8 K clock
Differential clock selection
STACK
OUT
DB-28
The STACK OUT port supports the signal
outputs of:
Power supply alarm
RS-485 serial port of the fan
STACK IN DB-28
The STACK IN port supports the signal
inputs of:
Power supply alarm
HWTF
HWIN DB-28
The HWIN port supports the signal inputs of
the HABE frame:
HW
Frame header of narrowband clock
Serial port
Broadband clock
In-position
EFTF NA DB-68
The EFTF card provides eight E1
conversion ports or eight FE conversion
ports.
Its relative card is APSB.
HLAF NA DB-68
The HLAF card provides one port for
transmitting high speed subtending signal
between the HABD and HABF frame.
HLSF NA DB-68
The HLSF card provides one port for
transmitting high speed subtending signal
between the HABD and HABE frame.
SLTF NA DB-68
The SLTF card provides 32 xSL conversion
ports or 16 E1 conversion ports.
Its relative card is xSL.

The HABE frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the frame, as shown in
Figure 210.

2-15

Figure 210 Power supply ports on the HABE frame
Table 210 describes the power supply ports on the HABE frame.
Table 210 Description of power supply ports on the HABE frame
PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power supply port
+5 V power cable
input cable
PWRIO-2(5V/RING)
5 V/Ring current
power supply port

2.5 HABF Frame
2.5.1 Overview
The HABF frame is the extended frame of the front-access UA5000.
The HABF frame provides 18 line card slots. Narrowband line cards and broadband line
cards can be intermixed.
The HABF frame cannot work independently. The HABD or HABE frame provides the
power supply for the HABF frame and extends the bus to the HABF frame for
management.
2.5.2 Layout
The HABF frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.
Table 211 Types of cards in the HABF frame
Type Card
Broadband line card

2-16
Type Card
EDTB
Broadband and narrowband
combo line card

Figure 211 shows the HABF frame layout.
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
Fan
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
Cable routing area
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
P
W
R
I
O
Subscriber cable
connecting area

Figure 211 HABF frame layout
In Figure 211, "xSL" stands for the line card.
The HABF frame uses the H601HABF backplane.
2.5.3 External Port
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame through relevant
conversion cards. Figure 212 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting
area.

2-17
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
H
L
E
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
S
L
T
F
H
L
E
F
H
L
E
F
H
L
E
F
H
W
T
F
S
L
T
F
Control and
interconnect cable
connecting area
Subscriber cable
connecting area

Figure 212 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame
Table 212 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABF frame
CLKOUT RJ-45
The CLKOUT port supports the signal outputs
of:
Differential 8 K clock
Differential clock selection
STACK
OUT
DB-28
The STACK OUT port supports the signal
outputs of:
Power supply alarm
RS-485 serial interface of the fan
STACK IN DB-28
The STACK IN supports the signal inputs of:
Circuit and loop-line test
Power supply alarm
HWTF
HWIN DB-28
The HWIN port supports the following signal
inputs about the HABF frame:
HW
Frame header of narrowband clock
Serial port
Broadband clock
In-position
HLEF NA DB-68
The HLEF card provides one port for
transmitting the high speed subtending signal
between the HABD and HABE frames, or
between the HABE and HABF frames.

2-18
SLTF NA DB-68
The SLTF card provides 32 xSL conversion
ports or 16 E1 conversion ports.
Its relative card is xSL.

II. Power supply port
The HABF frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the frame, as shown in
Figure 213.

Figure 213 Power supply ports on the HABF frame
Table 213 describes the power supply ports on the HABF frame.
Table 213 Description of the power supply ports on the HABF frame
PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power port
+5 V power cable
input cable
PWRIO-2(5V/RING)
5 V/Ring current
power supply port

2.6 HABL Frame
2.6.1 Overview
The HABL frame is a mini master frame of the UA5000.
The HABL frame provides 12 slots, and its configuration is as follows:
backup.

2-19
backup.
There are five slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be
intermixed.
Maximum three 32-port broadband and narrowband combo line cards can reside
in the HABL frame. Maximum five other line cards can reside in the HABL frame.
2.6.2 Layout
The HABL frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.
Table 214 Types of cards in the HABL frame
Type Card
Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, and PVM
Broadband line card
EDTB
line card

Figure 214 shows the HABL frame layout.

2-20
01 02 00
FAN
P
W
X
x
S
L
x
P
M
B
P
V
x
/
R
S
U
x
P
W
X
x
S
L
Cable routing area
x
P
M
B
x
S
L
x
S
L
x
S
L
P
V
x
/
R
S
U
x
03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
Cable connecting area
T
S
S
B
/
T
S
S
C

Figure 214 HABL frame layout
In Figure 214,
PWX stands for the secondary power card.
TSSB/TSSC stands for the test card.
RSUx stands for the remote subscriber unit.
The HABL frame uses the H601HABL backplane.

Note:

2.6.3 External Port
Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame through relevant
conversion cards. Table 215 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting
area.

2-21
P
S
T
F
E
F
T
F
E
1
T
F
S
L
T
F
0
S
L
T
F
1
S
L
T
F
2
S
L
T
F
3
S
L
T
F
4
S
L
T
F
5

Figure 215 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame
Table 215 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABL frame
Card Port type Signal description Relative card
RJ-45
Two environment monitoring
serial ports
PSTF
3V3 48 V power supply
NA
EFTF DB-68
16 E1 conversion ports or eight
FE conversion ports
APMB/IPMB
E1TF DB-68 16 E1 conversion ports
PVM/PVU8/PVU4/RSU8
/RSU4
SLTF DB-68
32 xSL conversion ports or 16 E1
conversion ports
AIUB/xSL

I. Power supply ports
The power supply ports provided by the HABL frame are on the front panel of the PSTF
conversion card in the cable connecting area.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards

3-1
Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards
3.1 About This Chapter
This chapter describes the cards used in the UA5000.
3.2 ATM Service Processing CardH601APMB
3.2.1 Overview
The broadband control card H601APMB is the ATM service processing card. It has the
following functions:
Controls the broadband line cards of the UA5000.
Provides the broadband switching resources and working clocks.
Provides various ports for upstream broadband services.
Provides the dual-system hot backup function.
The H601APMB resides in the slot for the broadband control card. The card provides
two slots for subcards. One subcard is near the front panel of the H601APMB and the
other near the backplane.
Subcards near the front panel include:
155 Mbit/s ATM optical port subcard (providing up to two ATM optical ports)
622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port subcard (providing up to two VP Ring optical ports)
ATM E3 subcard (providing up to two E3 ports)
ATM T3 subcard (providing up to two T3 ports)
Subcards near the backplane include:
CES subcard (providing up to eight E1 ports)
ATM E3 subcard (providing up to two E3 ports)
IMA E1 subcard (providing up to eight E1 ports)
3.2.2 Front Panel
Figure 31 shows the front panel of the H601APMB card.

3-2
RUN
ACT
RST
E
T
H
C
O
M
Running status LED
Active/Standby LED
Reset button
High speed signal port
APMB
Maintenance Ethernet port
Maintenance serial port

Figure 31 Front panel of the H601APMB card
Table 31 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card.
Table 31 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card
Name Status description
RUN 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally.
ON The card is active.
ACT
OFF The card is standby.

Table 32 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB card.

3-3
Table 32 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB
card
Name Function description
RST The button is used to reset the card manually.
COM
The port connects to the maintenance terminal for local or remote
maintenance. Through tools such as Hyper Terminal, configure the
system by using command lines.
ETH
The RJ-45 port provides the 10M Base-T semi-duplex network
management interface for system maintenance and configuration.
High speed
signal port
By configuring different subcards, the H601APMB can provide
different high speed signal ports.

3.2.3 Subcard
The H601APMB board provides two slots for subcards. The subcards have two types:
subcard near the front panel and subcard near the backplane.
Figure 32 shows the subcards supported by the H601APMB board.

3-4
Subcards near
the front panel
155 M optical
subboard
H601O1CNH
H601O2CNH
H601O2CNG
H601O2CNB
H601CESA
H601E81A
H601E23A
H601E13A
Subcards
when one
APMB is
configured
H601V2HAF
H602V2HAF
H601V2HAG
H602V2HAG
H602V2HCF
H602V2HCG
H602V1HAF
H602V1HAG
H602V1HTF
H602V1HTG
H602V1HCF
H602V1HCG
H602V1HEF
H602V1HEG
S
u
b
c
a
r
d
s

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d

b
y

A
P
M
B
Subcards near
the backplane
622 M optical
subboard
Subcards
when two
APMBs are
configured
Electrical
subcard
H601E13F
H601E23F
H601T13F
H601T23F

Figure 32 Subcards supported by the H601APMB board
II. Subcards near the front panel
Table 33 lists the subcard providing the 155 Mbit/s optical port. These subcards are
used when the UA5000 works as an ONU.

3-5
Table 33 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB card (I)
Name Port Interface attribute
H601O1CNH One ATM optical port
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Transmission distance: 60 km
Port type: SC
H601O2CNH Two ATM optical ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Port type: SC
H601O2CNG Two ATM optical ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Port type: SC
H601O2CNB Two ATM optical ports
Multi-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Port type: SC

Table 34 lists the subcards providing the 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port. These
subcards are used only when one APMB board is configured in a UA5000 frame.
Table 34 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (II)
Name Port Port attribute
The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working as the ONU in the VP Ring.
H601V2HAF Two optical ports
Single-mode
Central wavelength: 1310 nm
Port type: SC
H602V2HAF Two optical ports
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H601V2HAG Two optical ports
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V2HAG Two optical ports
Single-mode
Port type: SC
The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working at the OLT side in the VP
Ring to provide stratum 3 clock for the VP Ring which adopts the UA5000-only
networking mode.

3-6
H602V2HCF Two optical ports
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V2HCG Two optical ports
Single-mode
Port type: SC

Table 35 lists the subcards providing the 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port. These
subcards are used when two APMB boards are configured.
Table 35 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (III)
The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working as the ONU in the VP Ring.
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
This port is used for the UA5000 to connect with
other UA5000 or MD5500 in the VP Ring.
H602V1HAF
One optical port
Multi-mode
Port type: SC
This port is used to connect the active APMB
with the standby APMB.
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HAG
One optical port
Multi-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HTF
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC

3-7
One electrical port
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HTG
One electrical port
The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working at the OLT side in the VP Ring
to provide stratum 3 clock for the VP Ring which adopts the pure-UA5000 networking
mode.
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
other UA5000 in the VP Ring.
H602V1HCF
One optical port
Multi-mode
Port type: SC
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HCG
One optical port
Multi-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HEF
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC

3-8
One electrical port
One optical port
Single-mode
Port type: SC
H602V1HEG
One electrical port

Table 36 lists the subcards near the front panel.
Table 36 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (IV)
Subcard Port
H601E23F Two ATM E3 electrical ports
F601E13F One ATM E3 electrical port
H601T23F Two ATM DS3(T3) electrical ports
H601T13F One ATM DS3(T3) electrical port

III. Description of subcards near the backplane
Table 37 lists the subcards near the backplane supported by the H601APMB board.
Table 37 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (V)
Subcard Port
H601CESA Eight E1 ports, providing the CES
H601E8IA Eight IMA E1 electrical ports
H601E23A Two ATM E3 electrical ports
H601E13A One ATM E3 electrical port


3-9
IV. DIP switches and jumpers of H601CESA
There are four DIP switches S1S4 on the H601CESA card. Among them, switches S1
and S4 are used to select the matching impedance of the E1 port, while S2 and S3 are
used to set the grounding of the E1 port.
Table 38 DIP switches S1 and S4 of the H601CESA card
Switch
75-ohm
cable
120-ohm
cable
Note
S1 ON OFF Bits 18 correspond to E1 ports 18.
S4 ON OFF
Used for the host query, same with
S1.
Only Bit 1 is applied, and others are
reserved.

Table 39 DIP switches S2 and S3 of the H601CESA card
Switch
Connected to
PGND
Suspended Note
S2 ON OFF Used to set E1 ports 14.

V. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA
There are five DIP switches S1S5 on the H601E8IA card.
S1 is used to query the port impedance. The setting shall be consistent with S2
and S4.
S2 and S4 are used to select the matching impedance of the port. The settings of
all the eight E1 ports must be the same.
S3 and S5 are used to set the grounding of the E1 port.
Table 310 DIP switches S1, S2 and S4 of the H601E8IA card
Switch
75-ohm
cable
120-ohm
cable
Note
S1 ON OFF
Only Bit 1 is applied, and others are
reserved.


3-10
Table 311 DIP switches S3 and S5 of the H601E8IA card
Switch Connected to PGND Suspended Note

Note:
The H601E23A, H601E13A, H601E23F, H601E13F, H601T23F and H601T13F
subcards have no DIP switches and jumpers. They only support the 75-ohm port
matching impedance.

3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane
Pins of the H601APMB card have three parts: J1, J2, and J3. The four channels of E1
signals provided by the H601APMB card are defined on J3, as shown in
Figure 33. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. For details, see
Table 312.
1
5
10
15
20
25
a b c d e f g h
J1
J2
J3
J3

Figure 33 Pin assignment on the H601APMB card

3-11
Table 312 Pin assignment on the H601APMB backplane
Pin row a b c d e f g h
4 E1-1 E1-0
3 E1-3 E1-2
2 E1-5 E1-4
1 E1-7 E1-6

3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave FrameH601APSB
3.3.1 Overview
The H601APSB card is the broadband control card of the slave frame in the UA5000.
The H601APSB card supports dual-system hot backup and active/standby switchover.
Besides, the H601APSB card supports the multicast services.
3.3.2 Front Panel
Figure 34 shows the front panel of the H601APSB card.

3-12
Running status LED
Active/Standby LED
Reset button
RUN
ACT
RST
APSB

Figure 34 Front panel of the H601APSB card
Table 313 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card.
Table 313 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is being loaded.
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally. RUN
ON or OFF The card works abnormally.
ACT

The RST button on the front panel of the H601APSB card is used to reset the card
manually.

3-13
3.4 IP Service Processing CardH601IPMB
3.4.1 Overview
The H601IPMB card is the IP service processing card of the UA5000, it has the
Controls the broadband line cards of the UA5000.
Converges and processes various broadband services, such as ADSL, VDSL,
SHDSL and LAN services.
Transfer VoIP service of the PVM card.
Provides multicast service and dedicated service channels.
Transmits IP services upstream through an FE or a GE port.
Provides broadband switching resources.
Supports the dual-system hot backup.
Supports the active/standby switching.
An H601IPMB card provides the following buses and ports:
Twelve LVDS buses to line cards in the master frame
Eighteen LVDS buses to line cards in the extended frame
Two LVDS multicast LVDS buses to line cards in the slave frame
Two FE ports on the backplane to connect with the PVM, which are used to
provide IP channels for VoIP services
Four FE ports on the backplane, which can provide LAN services through
conversion cards
Two upstream FE ports or two upstream GE ports on the front panel, which are
actually provided by subcards on the H601IPMB card
Four FE ports on the backplane, which can provide broadband access services or
be used as upstream ports.
See Figure 35 for details.

3-14
IPMB
PVM
PVM
1FE
1FE
Backplane
1FE
1FE
To line cards in the master
frame (12 LVDS buses)
4 FE ports
2 FE/2 GE
upstream ports
To line cards in the extended
frame (18 LVDS buses)
To the slave frame
(2 LVDS buses)
To the slave frame
(2 multicast buses)
To the extended frame
(4 multicast buses)

Figure 35 Buses and ports provided by the IPMB card
3.4.2 Front Panel
Figure 36 shows the front panel of the H601IPMB card.

3-15
Running status LED
Active/Standby LED
Reset button
High speed signal port
RUN
ACT
RST
E
T
H
C
O
M
IPMB

Figure 36 Front panel of the H601IPMB card
Table 314 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card.
Table 314 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally.
RUN
OFF The card works abnormally.
ACT

Table 315 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB card.

3-16
Table 315 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB
card
High speed
signal port
By configuring different subcards, the H601IPMB card can provide
different Ethernet port, including FE optical/electrical port subcard
and GE optical port.
COM
RJ-45 port for local or remote maintenance. Through COM, the Hyper
Terminal or other tools can configure the system by using command
lines.
ETH
The RJ-45 port provides the 10M Base-T or 100M Base-T adaptive
full-duplex network management interface for system maintenance
and configuration.

3.4.3 Subcard
Table 316 lists the subcards supported by the H601IPMB card.
Table 316 Subcards supported by the H601IPMB card
Subcard Port Port parameter
H601E2FN
Two 10/100M Ethernet
electrical ports
NA
H601O2FNF
Two 10/100M Ethernet optical
ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Transmission distance: 15
km
Port type: LC
H601O2FNB
Two 10/100M Ethernet optical
ports
Multi-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Port type: LC
H601O1FNF
One 10/100M Ethernet optical
ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
km
Port type: LC
H601O1FNB
One 10/100M Ethernet optical
port
Multi-mode Wavelength:
1310 nm Transmission
distance: 2 km
Port type: LC

3-17
Subcard Port Port parameter
H601O2GNA Two GE optical ports
Multi-mode
Wavelength: 850 nm
m
Port type: LC
H601O2GNE Two GE optical ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
km
Port type: LC
H601O2GNG Two GE optical ports
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1550 nm
km
Port type: LC
H601O1GNE One GE optical port
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1310 nm
km
Port type: LC
H601O1GNA One GE optical port
Multi-mode
Wavelength: 850 nm
m
Port type: LC
H601O1GNG One GE optical port
Single-mode
Wavelength: 1510 nm
km
Port type: LC

Pins of the H601IPMB card have three parts: J1, J2, and J3. The eight channels of FE
signals provided by the H601APMB card are defined on J3, as shown in
Figure 37. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. For details, see
Table 317.

3-18
1
5
10
15
20
25
a b c d e f g h
J1
J2
J3
J3

Figure 37 Pin assignment on the H601IPMB card
Table 317 Pin assignment on J3 of the H601IPMB backplane
Pin row a b c d e f g h
4 FE-1 FE-0
3 FE-3 FE-2
2 FE-5 FE-4
1 FE-7 FE-6

3.5 Packet Voice Processing
CardAG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB
3.5.1 Overview
The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card is the packet voice processing card.
It has the following functions:
Transmits TDM voice signals to LE through the V5 interface.
Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets and transmits them to the
SoftSwitch.
Supports 204 voice channels.
Manages and communicates with narrowband line cards.
Performs the V5 and H.248/MGCP protocol processing.

3-19
The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card provides four E1 ports through the
backplane for access services or narrowband upstream services.
The AG03PVM, AG03PVMCF, and AG03PVMCB cards use different front leading-out
ports:
The AG03PVM card uses the 10M Base-T/100 M Base-T network port for
upstream services.
The AG03PVMCF card uses the 100 M single-mode optical port for upstream
services.
The AG03PVMCB card uses the 100 M multi-mode optical port for upstream
services.
When two cards are configured, the two cards work in the active/standby mode, and the
voice channels and the E1 ports on the two cards work in the load sharing mode.
3.5.2 Front Panel
Figure 38 shows the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.
RUN
RESET
Running status LED
Reset button
Optical port
PVMCB
C
O
M
Rx
Tx
100BASE-FX
MM MODULE
Active/Standby LED ACT
L
A
N
Maintenance network port
Link connection LED
LINK-Fx
RUN
RST
Reset button
PVM
C
O
M
ACT
L
A
N
W
A
N
Service
network port
100BASE-FX
SM MODULE
RUN
RESET
PVMCF
C
O
M
Rx
Tx
ACT
L
A
N
LINK-Fx

Figure 38 Front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card

3-20
Table 318 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting up.
RUN
ACT
ON The link connects normally.
LINK-Fx
OFF The link connects abnormally.

Note
The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card can start up normally only after the
PWX card works normally.

Table 319 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.
Name Function description Note
RESET/RST
The button is used to reset the
card manually.
NA
LAN
It is used to load the version in the
BIOS mode, or view the
debugging information channel.
10M Base-T/100M Base-T
adaptive full-duplex
network port
WAN
It is the IP upstream port for voice
and control signals.
10M Base-T/100M Base-T
network port
100BASE-Fx
MM MODULE
One 100 M multi-mode
optical port:
Central wavelength:
1310 nm
Transmission distance 2
km
Port type: LC

3-21
100BASE-Fx
SM MODULE
One 100 M single-mode
optical port:
Central wavelength:
1310 nm
Transmission distance
15 km
Port type: LC
COM
It provides the function for local
and remote maintenance. It
configures the system in the CLI
through software such as
HyperTerminal.
RS232 serial port

3.5.3 Jumpers
Figure 39 shows the layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.
J
6
1 2
1
5
1
6
J
1
3
1 2
1
5
1
6

Figure 39 Layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card
Table 320 describes jumpers J6 and J13.
Table 320 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J13
Jumper Status description
J6 CLOSE
E1 signal is connected to PGND. It is also the
factory setting.

3-22
OPEN E1 signal is not connected to PGND.
CLOSE
Select the 75-ohm E1 cable. It is also the
factory setting.
J13
OPEN Select the 120-ohm E1 cable.

In Table 320, for jumpers J6 and J13:
"CLOSE" means the following bit pairs are short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4,
bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15
and 16.
"OPEN" means the following bit pairs are not short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3
and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and
bits 15 and 16.
The relationship between J6, J13 and E1 is as follows:
Bits 1-2, 3-4 of J6 and J13 correspond to E1 signals of channel 0.
Bits 5-6, 7-8 of J6 and J13 correspond to signals of channel 1 E1.

Note:
75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal.
For the 75-ohm matching impedance,, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable)
for transmission.
For the 120-ohm matching impedance,, use the balanced cable (differential
symmetric pair) for transmission.
To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and
make the data configuration consistent at both ends.

One AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card provides four channels of E1 signals,
connected with the 17th31st rows of pins on the upper HEADER, as shown in
Figure 310. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.
RR03: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 03.
RT03: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 03.
TR03: ring of E1 transmitting of signals channels 03.
TT03: tip of E1 transmitting of signals channels 03.

3-23
Transmitting (Tx) and receiving (Rx) of the E1 signals are discussed at the
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB side.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
RR0
TR0
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RT0
TT0
RT1
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

3.6 Packet Voice Processing
CardH601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG
3.6.1 Overview
The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card is the packet voice
processing card. It has the following functions:
Transmits TDM voice signals to LE through the V5 interface.
Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets and transmits them to the
SoftSwitch.
Supports 500 voice channels.
Manages and communicates with narrowband line cards in the UA5000 frame.
Performs the V5 and H.248/MGCP protocol processing.
The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides four E1 ports
through the backplane for access services or narrowband upstream services.

3-24
The H601PVMB, H601PVMBB, H601PVMBF, and H601PVMBG cards use different
front leading-out ports:
The H601PVMB card uses the 10/100 M Base-T network for upstream services.
The H601PVMBB card uses the 100 M multi-mode optical port for upstream
services.
The H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card uses the 100 M single-mode optical port for
upstream services.
When two cards are configured, the two cards work in the active/standby mode, and the
voice channels and the E1 ports on the two cards work in the load sharing mode.
3.6.2 Front Panel
Figure 311 shows the front panel of the H601PVMB card.
RST
Reset button
PVMB
C
O
M
L
A
N
Maintenance network port
W
A
N
Service network port
RUN Running status LED

Figure 311 Front panel of the H601PVMB card
Figure 312shows the front panel of the
H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card.

3-25
RUN
RST
Running Status LED
Reset button
Optical port
PVMBG
Rx
Tx
100BASE-FX
SM MODULE
Link connection LED
LINK-Fx
Link connection LED ACT-Fx
C
O
M
L
A
N
Maintenance network cable
RUN
RST
PVMBB
C
O
M
Rx
Tx
100BASE-FX
MM MODULE
ACT
LINK-Fx
ACT-Fx
L
A
N
RUN
RST
PVMBF
C
O
M
Rx
Tx
100BASE-FX
SM MODULE
ACT
LINK-Fx
ACT-Fx
L
A
N

Figure 312 Front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG
card
Table 321 Description of the LEDS on the front panel of the
H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting up.
RUN
ACT
ON The link connects normally.
LINK-Fx
OFF The link connects abnormally.

3-26
Blinking
Communication of the link is
normal.
ACT-Fx
OFF The link has no communication.

Note:
The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card can start up normally
only after the PWX card works normally.

Table 322 describes the ports and the button on the front panel of the
Table 322 Description of the ports and the button on the front panel of the
LAN
It is used to load the version in the BIOS
mode, or view the debugging information
channel.
10 M Base-T/100 M
Base-T adaptive
full-duplex network
port
WAN
It is the IP upstream port for voice and
control signals.
10 M Base-T/100 M
Base-T network port
100BASE-Fx
MM MODULE
control signals.
One 100 M
multi-mode optical
port:
Central wavelength:
1310 nm
Transmission
distance 2 km
Port type: LC
100BASE-Fx
SM MODULE
control signals.
One 100 M
single-mode optical
port:
Central wavelength:
1310 nm
Transmission
distance 15 km
(H601PVMBF)
Transmission
distance 40 km
(H601PVMBG)
Port type: LC

3-27
COM
It provides the function for local and remote
maintenance. It configures the system in
the CLI through software such as
HyperTerminal.
RS232 serial port
RST
The button is used to reset the card
manually.
NA

3.6.3 Jumpers
The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides two jumpers
J6 and J7, as shown in Figure 313.
J7
1
2
1 5
1 6
J
6
1
6
1
5
21

Figure 313 Layout of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card
Table 323 describes jumpers J6 and J7.
Table 323 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J7 on the
CLOSE
E1 signal is connected to PGND. It is also the
factory setting.
J6
OPEN E1 signal is not connected to PGND.

3-28
CLOSE
Select the 75-ohm E1 cable. It is also the factory
setting.
J7
OPEN Select the 120-ohm E1 cable.

In Table 323, for jumpers J6 and J7:
"CLOSE" means the following bit pairs are short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4,
bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15
and 16.
"OPEN" means the following bit pairs are not short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3
and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and
bits 15 and 16.
The relationship between J6, J7 and E1 is as follows:
Bits 1-2, 3-4 of J6 and J7 correspond to E1 channel 0.

Note:
For the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable)
for transmission.
For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential

One H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides four
channels of E1 signals, connected with the 17th31st rows of pins of upper HEADER,
as shown in Figure 314. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.
RR03: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 03.
RT03: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 03.
TR03: ring of E1 transmitting of signals channels 03.
TT03: tip of E1 transmitting of signals channels 03.

3-29
Transmitting (Tx) and receiving (Rx) of the E1 signals are discussed at the
H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/ H601PVMBG side.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
RR0
TR0
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RT0
TT0
RT1
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

3.7 V5 Interface Processing UnitH601PVU8/H601PVU4
3.7.1 Overview
The H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card is the V5 interface processing unit.
As the control card of the narrowband service, the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card has the
Controls the narrowband line cards in the same frame or the extended frame.
Provides the upstream E1 port, switching resources and working clock for
narrowband services.
Supports up to five extended frames.
Supports the active/standby mode and the dual-system hot backup working mode
to make the system more reliable.
The E1 ports do not work in the active/standby mode. When two
H601PVU8/H601PVU4 cards are used, the number of E1 ports available is doubled.

3-30
One H601PVU8 card provides eight E1 ports, while one H601PVU4 card provides four
E1 ports. Both provide eight 2 Mbit/s HWs to connect with the line cards in the same
frame, and ten 8 Mbit/s HWs to connect with up to five extended frames. When two
H601PVU8/H601PVU4 cards work together, they provide 16 E1 ports, eight 2 Mbit/s
HWs, and ten 8 Mbit/s HWs.
Through these E1 ports, the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card can interconnect or subtend
with a Local Exchange (LE), an OLT or an ONU.
Through the NM serial port the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card provides, you can
configure the card through a command line terminal or a network management system
(NMS).
3.7.2 Front Panel
Figure 315 shows the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards.
Running status LED
Reset button
DIP switch
Active/Standby LED for card clock
Port status LED
Port link status LED
Communication link status LED for active and standby cards
NM serial port status LED
E1 link status LED
Communication LED for master and slave nodes
Ethernet port status LED
RUN
CLK
RST
PVU8
V5S
V5L
MSL
COM
E1S
NOD
ETN
C
O
M
E
T
H
RUN
CLK
RST
PVU4
V5S
V5L
MSL
COM
E1S
NOD
ETN
C
O
M
E
T
H

Figure 315 Front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards
Table 324 describes the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the
H601PVU4 cards.

3-31
Table 324 Descriptions of the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the
H601PVU4 cards
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The active card is normal.
0.1s ON and 1.9s OFF
repeatedly
The standby card is normal.
repeatedly
Smooth switching from standby mode to
active mode.
repeatedly
The system is being loaded, or the
active-standby mode is not yet
determined.
RUN
Blinking at an interval of less
than 0.25S repeatedly
The loading program is being
decompressed.
ON The card clock is active.
CLK
OFF The card clock is standby.
(Active card) ON All interfaces are normal.
(Active card) OFF All interfaces are abnormal.
(Active card) blinking
Some interfaces are abnormal. If there
are more abnormal interfaces, the
blinking frequency is higher.
V5S
For the standby card, it is
constantly OFF.
The V5S of the standby card has no other
states.
(Active card) ON All links are normal.
(Active card) OFF All links are abnormal.
(Active card) blinking
Some links are abnormal. If there are
more abnormal links, the blinking
frequency is higher.
V5L
For the standby card, it is
constantly OFF.
The V5L of the standby card has no other
states.
repeatedly
Links are normal.
MSL
OFF Links are abnormal.
ON
Communication with the configuration
terminal is normal.
COM
OFF
Communication with the configuration
terminal is abnormal.
E1S ON The E1 link is normal.

3-32
OFF
The E1 link frame is out of
synchronization or loses carrier.
repeatedly
Bit slip.

repeatedly
Remote frame is out of synchronization.
repeatedly
Failed to communicate with the host.
NOD
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly Start to run normally after configuration.
ETN ON The network port is receiving data.

Note:
The H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card can start up normally only after the PWX card works
normally.

Table 325 describes the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the
H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card.
H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card
Name Status description Note
RST The button is used to reset the card manually. NA
DIP switch
It specifies the E1S LED to indicate the status
of a specific E1 link.
ON indicates the binary number of the bit is 1
and OFF 0.
The first E1 link corresponding to bits 13 is
000, and the eighth E1 link corresponding to
bits 13 is 111.
The first three bits
are used. The
fourth is reserved.
COM
The RJ-45 socket provides the function for
local and remote maintenance. It configures
the system in the CLI through software such
as HyperTerminal.
RS-232 serial port
ETH
The RJ-45 socket provides the 10 M Base-T
network management port for system
maintenance and configuration.
10 M Base-T
half-duplex
Ethernet port


3-33
3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers
I. DIP switches
When the system runs normally, the setting of the DIP switch on the front panel
specifies the E1 port whose status is to be displayed by the E1S LED. See
Table 326 for details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.
Table 326 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card
DIP switch (321) E1 port number
000 1
001 2
010 3
011 4
100 5
101 6
110 7
111 8

Figure 316 shows the layout of the H601PVU8 card.
H601PVU8
J
1
4
J
1
6
J
1
5
J
1
3

Figure 316 Layout of the H601PVU8 card

3-34
II. Jumpers J14 and J16
Jumpers J14 and J16 are used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the
E1 Tx end. Table 327 lists their settings and meanings.
Setting Meaning
ON PGND
OFF NC

III. Jumpers J13 and J15
Jumpers J13 and J15 are used to set the line matching impedance of the E1 Rx end.
Table 328 lists their settings and meanings.
Setting Meaning
ON 75-ohm
OFF 120-ohm

for transmission.
In selecting the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and
The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU8 card are connected with
the 17th32nd rows of pins, as shown in Figure 317. The figure is seen from the rear
of the backplane. Where, the four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU4
card are the first four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU8 card.
The characters in Figure 317 are described as follows:
R1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 receiving signals.
R1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 receiving signals.
T1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.
T1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.

3-35
I1B I1A
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
73
77
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
41
45
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
R1-R
R5-R
T1-R
T5-R
R2-R
R6-R
T2-R
T6-R
R3-R
R7-R
T3-R
T7-R
R4-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
R1-T
R5-T
T1-T
T5-T
R2-T
R6-T
T2-T
T6-T
R3-T
R7-T
T3-T
T7-T
R4-T
R8-T
T4-T
T8-T

Figure 317 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVU8 card
3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing
CardH601RSU8/H601RSU4
3.8.1 Overview
The H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card is the remote subscriber processing card. It has the
Controls the narrowband line cards in the remote subscriber frame.
Implements the subtending of narrowband services with the UA5000 master frame
or the MD5500 frame.
Provides upstream E1 ports for the narrowband services.
The H601RSU8 or the H601RSU4 is often used in pairs. Two H601RSU8 or
H601RSU4 cards work in the active/standby mode to enhance the system reliability.
The E1 ports do not support the active/standby switchover. When two cards are
configured, the number of the E1 ports provided doubles.
One H601RSU8 card provides eight E1 ports, eight 2M HWs for the line cards in this
frame, and ten 8M HWs for up to five extended frames. When two H601RSU8 cards
work together, they provide 16 E1 ports, eight 2M HWs and ten 8M HWs.

3-36
An H601RSU4 card provides four E1 ports. Other specifications are the same as those
of the H601RSU8 card.
3.8.2 Front Panel
Figure 318 shows the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.
RUN
CLK
RSU8
V5S
V5L
MSL
COM
E1S
NOD
ETN
RUN
CLK
RSU4
V5S
V5L
MSL
COM
E1S
NOD
ETN
Running status LED
Reset button
DIP switch
Active/Standby LED for card clock
Port status LED
Port link status LED
Communication link status LED for active and standby cards
Communication link status LED for foreground and background
E1 link status LED
Ethernet port status LED

Figure 318 Front panel of H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card
Table 329 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.

3-37
Table 329 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4
card
1S ON and 1S OFF repeatedly The active card is normal.
0.1S ON and 1.9S OFF repeatedly
The standby card is
normal.
Smooth switching from
standby mode to active
mode.
The system is being
loaded, or the
active-standby mode is not
yet determined.
RUN
Blinking at an interval of less than
0.25S
The loading program is
being decompressed.
ON The card clock is active.
CLK
OFF The card clock is standby.
V5S Reserved NA
V5L Reserved NA
1.9S ON and 0.1S OFF repeatedly Links are normal.
MSL
OFF Links are abnormal.
COM Reserved NA
ON The E1 link is normal.
OFF
The E1 link frame is out of
synchronization or loses
carrier.
0.9S ON and 0.1 OFF repeatedly Bit slip.
E1S
Note: The
DIP switch on
the front
panel decides
to display the
E1 status of a
specific
channel.
0.5S ON and 0.5 OFF repeatedly
Remote frame is out of
synchronization.
Failed to communicate with
the host.
NOD
1S ON and 1S OFF repeatedly
Start to run normally after
configuration.
ETN Reserved NA

Table 330 describes the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the
H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.

3-38
H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card
Reset button The button is used to reset the card manually.
DIP switch
It specifies the E1S LED to indicate the status of a specific E1 link.
The first three bits are used. The fourth is reserved.
ON indicates the binary number of the bit is 1 and OFF 0.
The first E1 link corresponding to bits 13 is 000, and the eighth
E1 link corresponding to bits 13 is 111.
Debug serial
port
RJ-45 connector and RS-232 serial port
Maintenance
network port
RJ-45 connector and 10M Base-T semi-duplex network port.
I. DIP switches
When the system runs normally, the setting of the DIP switch on the front panel
specifies the E1 port whose status is to be displayed by the E1S LED. See
Table 331 for details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.
Table 331 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601RSU8 card
DIP switch (321) E1 port number
000 1
001 2
010 3
011 4
100 5
101 6
110 7
111 8

Figure 319 shows the layout of the H601RSU8 card.

3-39
H601RSU8
J
1
4
J
1
6
J
1
5
J
1
3

Figure 319 Layout of the H601RSU8 card
II. Jumpers J14 and J16
Jumpers J14 and J16 are used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the
E1 Tx end. Table 332 lists their settings and meanings.
Setting Meaning
ON PGND
OFF NC

III. Jumpers J13 and J15
Jumpers J13 and J15 are used to set the line matching impedance of the E1 Rx end.
Table 333 lists their settings and meanings.
Setting Meaning
ON 75-ohm
OFF 120-ohm


3-40
for transmission.
In selecting the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and
The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU8 card are connected with
the 17th32nd rows of pins, as shown in Figure 320. The figure is seen from the rear
of the backplane. Where, the four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU4
card are the first four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU8 card.
The characters in Figure 320 are described as follows:
R1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 receiving signals.
R1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 receiving signals.
T1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.
T1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.
I1B I1A
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
73
77
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
41
45
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
R1-R
R5-R
T1-R
T5-R
R2-R
R6-R
T2-R
T6-R
R3-R
R7-R
T3-R
T7-R
R4-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
R1-T
R5-T
T1-T
T5-T
R2-T
R6-T
T2-T
T6-T
R3-T
R7-T
T3-T
T7-T
R4-T
R8-T
T4-T
T8-T

Figure 320 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601RSU8 card

3-41
3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing CardH602RSUG
(2G.SHDSL)
3.9.1 Overview
The H602RSUG card is the main control unit in the ONU-60A subscriber frame. It has
the following features:
Forwards signaling of the master/slave node.
Manages the slave node.
Connects with the G.SHDSL port of the H601SDLT card at the central office.
Provides four TTL HWs for the two subscriber cards in the ONU-60A subscriber
frame, of which, two TTL HWs are allocated for each card.
Provides upstream connection for the two subscriber cards through its G.SHDSL
ports.
3.9.2 Front Panel
Figure 321 shows the front panel of the H602RSUG card.

3-42
RST
RSUG
Running status LED
Reset button
Communication link status LED
Reserved LED
2M service sattus LEDs
RUN
LINK
WAN1
E1
NOD
WAN2

Figure 321 Front panel of the H602RSUG card
Table 334 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card.
Table 334 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card
Name Meaning Description
repeatedly
Working is abnormal.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF
repeatedly
Working is normal.
ON Communication is normal.
repeatedly
Communication with the control card
has not been set up. NOD
1s ON and 1s OFF
repeatedly
The card starts working after being
configured.
LINK ON
Communication with the upper layer
equipment is normal.

3-43
Name Meaning Description

OFF
Communication with the upper layer
equipment is abnormal.
ON The link is normal.
WAN1 and
WAN2
OFF The link is abnormal.
ON E1 is normal.
E1
OFF E1 is abnormal.

Table 335 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG card.
Table 335 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG
card
Reset button The button is used to reset the card manually.
Debug serial
port
RS-232 serial port and RJ-45 connector, used for debugging and
printing.

The H602RSUG card provides two G.SHDSL ports, as shown in Figure 323.
Table 336 describes the characters in the following figures.
Table 336 Description of characters in the following figures
Character Meaning
GND Ground
+5V +5 V power supply
R- TIP/RING Receiving of E1 signals
T- TIP/RING Transmitting of E1 signals
HUHW0HUHW3 and
HDHW0HDHW3
For TTL HWs of the service card. In the ONU-60A
subscriber frame, HW0 and HW2 are allocated to the first
service card, and HW1 and HW3 are allocated to the
second service card.
LINEA0 and LINEB0 The first G.SHDSL port
LINEA2 and LINEB2 The second G.SHDSL port

Figure 322 and Figure 323 show the pin assignment between the H602RSUG card
and the backplane. It is the front view of the backplane.

3-44
POTS2+
PGND
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8+
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13+
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
+5V
DGND
DGND
PGND
+5V
+5V
PGND
PGND
R-RING
T-RING
PGND
R-TIP
T-TIP

Figure 322 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602RSUG card

3-45
HDHW1
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8+
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13+
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
DGND
PGND_1
PGND
HUHW2
HDHW2
HUHW3
HDHW3
LINEA2
LINEB2
PGND_1
HUHW0
HDHW0
HUHW1
DGND
PGND_1
LINEA0
LINEB0

Figure 323 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602RSUG card
3.10 ATM Port CardH601AIUB
3.10.1 Overview
The H601AIUB card is the ATM port card and resides in the slot for the interface card.
The H601AIUB card provides two slots for subcards.
The slot at the front panel side supports:
155 Mbit/s ATM optical port subcard, providing up to two ATM optical ports.
ATM E3 subcard, providing up to two E3 ports.
The slot at backplane side supports:
ATM E3 subcard, providing up to two E3 ports.
IMA E1 subcard, providing up to eight E1 ports.
3.10.2 Front Panel
Figure 324 shows the front panel of the H601AIUB card.

3-46
Running status LED
Active/Standby LED
Reset button
Signal port
RUN
ACT
RST
AIUB

Figure 324 Front panel of the H601AIUB card
Table 337 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card.
Table 337 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works normally.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The system is starting.
ACT

Table 338 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB card.

3-47
Table 338 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB
card
Signal
port
The front panel of the H601AIUB has slots for optical ports, you can
configure one to two 155 Mbit/s subcards if necessary.

3.10.3 Subcard
Table 339 lists the subcards on the H601AIUB card.
Table 339 Subcards on the H601AIUB card
Name Port Description
H601O1CNH One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 60 km, SC.
H601O2CNH Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 60 km, SC.
H601O1CNG One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 30 km, SC.
H601O1CNB One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.
H601O2CNG Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical ports Single-mode, 30 km, SC.
H601O2CNB Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical ports Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.
H601E8IA Eight IMA E1 electrical ports
Subcard near the
H601AIUB backplane
H601E23A Two ATM E3 electrical ports
Subcard near the
H601AIUB backplane
H601E13A One ATM E3 electrical port
Subcard near the
H601AIUB backplane
H601E23F Two ATM E3 electrical ports
Subcard near the
H601AIUB backplane
H601E13F One ATM E3 electrical port
Subcard near the
H601AIUB backplane

Five sets of DIP switches S1S5 on the H601E8IA subcard are used to distinguish the
cable type, as shown in Table 340.

3-48
Table 340 Description of DIP switches of the H601E8IA subcard
Switch 75-ohm cable 120-ohm cable
S1 ON for Bits 14 OFF for Bits 14

The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601AIUB card are separately
connected with the 1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER and the 25th32nd pin
rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 325 and Figure 326. The figures are
seen from the rear of the backplane.
The characters in Figure 325 and Figure 326 are described as follows:
RR18: ring of channels 18 E1 signals (receiving at the H601AIUB side).
RT18: tip of channel 18 E1 signals (receiving at the H601AIUB side).
TR18: ring of channels 18 E1 signals (transmitting at the H601AIUB side).
TT18: tip of channel 18 E1 signals (transmitting at the H601AIUB side).

3-49
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
RT1
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4

Figure 325 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601AIUB card

3-50
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
RT7
TT7
RT8
TT8
RR5
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
TR7
RR8
TR8

Figure 326 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601AIUB card
3.11 16-Port E1 Port CardH601EDTB
3.11.1 Overview
The H601EDTB card is the 16-port E1 port card. The 16 E1 ports can provide upstream
services and access services.
3.11.2 Front Panel
Figure 327 shows the front panel of the H601EDTB card.

3-51
EDTB
Running mode LED MODE
RUN Running status LED

Figure 327 Front panel of the H601EDTB card
Table 341 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card.
Table 341 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card
RUN
ON The card works in standalone mode.
MODE
OFF The card works in other mode.

3.11.3 Jumpers
There are two sets of jumpers and one set of pins on the H601EDTB card.
See Figure 328 for details.

3-52
1
1
5
1
6
2
J600
1
1
5
1
6
2
J800
1
1
5
1
6
2
J900
1
1
5
1
6
2
J700
1
9
1
0
2
J
2
0
3
1 15
16 2
J501
1 1 5
1 62
J502

Figure 328 Layout of the H601EDTB card
Table 342 describes settings of the jumpers.
Table 342 Settings of the jumpers on the H601EDTB card
Jumper Meaning
J600, J700,
J800, and
J900
Used to set the matching impedance of E1.
CLOSE: 75-ohm. It is also the factory setting.
OPEN: 120-ohm.
J501 and
J502
Used to set whether the ring of the 75-ohm E1 signal at the
transmitting side is grounded or not.
CLOSE: grounded.
OPEN: not grounded. It is also the factory setting.

Note:
In Table 342,
CLOSE means bits 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14, and 15-16 are
short-circuited.
OPEN means bits 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14, and 15-16 are not
short-circuited.

Table 343 shows the relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1
signals.

3-53
Table 343 Relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1 signals
Jumper Pins Corresponding E1 signals
J600 1-2 and 3-4 The 1st channel
J600 5-6 and 7-8 The 2nd channel
J600 9-10 and 11-12 The 3rd channel
J600 13-14 and 15-16 The 4th channel

Table 343 shows the relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals.
Table 344 Relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals
J501 1-2 The 1st channel
J501 3-4 The 2nd channel
J501 5-6 The 3rd channel
J501 7-8 The 4th channel

3-54

Note:
75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal. In
general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial
cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential
symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch is
set correctly and the data is consistent.

Pins of J203 define an RS232 maintenance serial port with the baud rate 9,600 bit/s.
Table 345 describes J203.
Table 345 Definition of pins of J203
Pin Meaning
1 Reserved
2 Data receiving
3 Data transmitting
4 GND
510 Reserved

The H601EDTB card provides 16 E1 ports, which are distributed to pin rows 116 on
the upper HEADER and pin rows 1732 on the lower HEADER.
See Figure 329 and Figure 330 for details. The figures are seen from the rear of the
backplane.
The symbols in Figure 329 and Figure 330 are described as follows:
RR015: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 015
RT015: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 015
TR015: ring of E1 transmitting signals of channels 015

3-55
TT015: tip of E1 transmitting signals of channels 015
Receiving and transmitting of E1 signals are at the H601EDTB side.
RT1
TT1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
RR9
RT9
TR9
TT9
RR10
RT10
TR10
TT10
RR11
RT11
TR11
TT11
RR12
RT12
TR12
TT12

Figure 329 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (upper HEADER)

3-56
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RR5
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
TR7
RR8
TR8
RR13
RT13
TR13
TT13
RR14
RT14
TR14
TT14
RR15
RT15
TR15
TT15
RR16
RT16
TR16
TT16
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
RT7
TT7
RT8
TT8

Figure 330 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (lower HEADER)
3.12 16-Port ADSL Line CardH601ADLB
3.12.1 Overview
The H601ADLB card is the 16-port ADSL line card with the built-in splitter, and is
suitable for ADSL over POTS.
The splitter has the following functions:
Separates the POTS signals from the ADSL signals on the subscriber cable.
Sends the POTS signals to the ASL card for processing.
Sends the ADSL signals to AC5 chipset for processing.
In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to the loop line after reassembled
through the splitter.
3.12.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the H601ADLB card, as described in
Table 346.

3-57
Table 346 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLB card
RUN
ON or OFF The card is abnormal.

Figure 331 shows the layout of the H601ADLB card.
H601ADLB
S5

Figure 331 Layout of the H601ADLB card
Table 347 Settings of DIP switch of the H601ADLB card
Close The card is enabled to load the software.
S5
Open
The card is disabled from loading the software. It
is also the factory setting.


3-58
Note:
For jumper S5:
Close means two bits are short-circuited.
Open means two bits are not short-circuited.

Figure 332 and Figure 333 show the pin assignment between the H601ADLB card
and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.
Where,
The 16 channels of ADSL signals are connected with the 1st16th pin rows on the
upper HEADER.
The 16 channels of POTS signals are connected with the 17th32nd pin rows on
the lower HEADER.
The numbers in Figure 332 and Figure 333 are the port serial numbers.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 332 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLB card

3-59
POTS0-
POTS4-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-
POTS0+
POTS0-
POTS1+
POTS1-
POTS2+
POTS2-
POTS3+
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS5-
POTS6+
POTS6-
POTS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 333 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLB card
Connect the subscriber cables as follows.
Connect the 16 ADSL subscriber cables to the A1 to A8, B1 to B16, and C1 to C8
rows of pins on the upper HEADER.
Connect the 16 POTS subscriber cables to the A25 to A32, B49 to B64 and C25 to
C32 rows of pins on the lower HEADER.
3.13 16-Port ADSL Line CardH601ADLF
3.13.1 Overview
The H601ADLF card is the 16-port ADSL line card with the built-in splitter, and is
suitable for ADSL over ISDN.
The H601ADLF card supports the test of 16 pairs of ADSL subscriber cables through
the broadband test card.
3.13.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card, as described in
Table 348.

3-60
Table 348 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card
0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF repeatedly The card is not registered.
RUN
2s ON and 2s OFF repeatedly
The card is registered, but the
firmware is not loaded.

Figure 334 shows the layout of the H601ADLF card.
H601ADLF
S5

Figure 334 Layout of the H601ADLF card
Table 349 Settings of jumper of the H601ADLF card
Close The card software can be loaded through the serial port.
S5
Open
The card software cannot be loaded through the serial
port. It is also the factory setting.


3-61
Note:
For jumper S5:
Close means two bits are short-circuited.
Open means two bits are not short-circuited.

Figure 335 and Figure 336 show the pin assignment between the H601ADLF card
Where,
upper HEADER.
the lower HEADER.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 335 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLF card

3-62
POTS0-
POTS4-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-
POTS0+
POTS0-
POTS1+
POTS1-
POTS2+
POTS2-
POTS3+
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS5-
POTS6+
POTS6-
POTS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 336 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLF card
3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line
CardH602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI
3.14.1 Overview
The H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card is the 16-port ADSL/ADSL 2+ line card
with the built-in splitter. The H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card provides the
ADSL broadband access services, and the ADSL broadband access services are
transmitted to the ATM network or IP network through the control card.
The differences between the H602ADMB, H602ADMC, and H602ADMI cards are as
follows:
The H602ADMB card does not support the circuit and loop line test.
The H602ADMI/H602ADMC card supports the circuit and loop line test and port
backup.
3.14.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI
card, as described in Table 350.

3-63
Table 350 Description of the LED on the front panel of the
H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on.
RUN

Figure 337 and Figure 338 show the pin assignment between the
H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card and the backplane. The figures are seen
from the rear of the backplane.
Where,
upper HEADER.
the lower HEADER.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96


3-64
POTS2+
POTS0-
POTS4-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-
POTS0+
POTS0-
POTS1+
POTS1-
POTS2+
POTS2-
POTS3+
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS5-
POTS6+
POTS6-
POTS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 338 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the
In Figure 337 and Figure 338:
A0 (B0)-A15 (B15) connect with port signal cables 015 of ADSL subscribers.
POTS 0-POTS 15 connect with port signal cables 015 of PSTN subscribers.
3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line CardH603ADRB
3.15.1 Overview
The H603ADRB card is the 32-port ADSL/ADSL2+ line card.
The H603ADRB card has the following features:
It has the built-in splitter.
It communicates with the broadband control card through the backplane. The
control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services.
It provides POTS services to the voice card through the DB68 port on the front
panel.
3.15.2 Front Panel
Figure 339 shows the front panel of the H603ADRB card.

3-65
Running status LED RUN
ADRB

Figure 339 Front panel of the H603ADRB card
Table 351 describes the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card.
Table 351 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly
The card is powered on and
performs self-test.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card is normal.

The D-type connector (68-pin, male) on the front panel provides the 32-channel POTS
port to the voice card.
Figure 340 shows the layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card.

3-66
H603ADRB
S1

Figure 340 Layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card
Table 352 describes settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card.
Table 352 Settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card
S1
Open
The card is disabled from loading the software. It is
also the factory setting.

Note:
Settings of jumper S1:
CLOSE: short-circuit the jumpers.
OPEN: switch off the jumpers.

Figure 341 and Figure 342 show the pin assignment between the H603ADRB card

3-67
Connect 16 subscriber cables to the 1st16th pin rows on the upper HEADER.
Connect the rest 16 subscriber cables to the 17th32nd pin rows on the lower
HEADER.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 341 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603ADRB card

3-68
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A24
A16
B16
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23

Figure 342 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603ADRB card
3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line CardH605ADRB
3.16.1 Overview
The H605ADRB card is the 32-port ADSL/ADSL2+ line card.
The H605ADRB card has the following features:
It has the built-in splitter
It supports the circuit and loop line test.
It supports the port backup.
It communicates with the broadband control card through the backplane. The
control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services.
It transmits the POTS service to the voice card through the DB68 socket on the
front panel.
3.16.2 Front Panel
Figure 343 shows the front panel of the H605ADRB card.

3-69
Running status LED RUN
ADRB

Figure 343 Front panel of the H605ADRB card
Table 353 describes the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card.
Table 353 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card
RUN

The D-type connector (68-pin, male) on the front panel provides the 32-channel POTS
port to the voice card.
Figure 344 shows the layout of the H605ADRB card.

3-70
H605ADRB
S1

Figure 344 Layout of the H605ADRB card
Table 354 Settings of jumper of the H605ADRB card
S1
Open
The card is disabled from loading the software.
It is also the factory setting.

Figure 345 and Figure 346 show the pin assignment between the H605ADRB card
and the backplane.
Connect 16 subscriber cables to the 1st16th pin rows on the upper HEADER.
Connect the rest 16 subscriber cables to the 17th32nd pin rows on the lower
HEADER.

3-71
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 345 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H605ADRB card

3-72
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A24
A16
B16
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23

Figure 346 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H605ADRB card
3.17 16-Port Analog Line CardCB36ASL/CB37ASL
3.17.1 Overview
The CB36ASL/CB37ASL card is the 16-port analog line card. It has the following
functions:
BORSCHT.
Reversed polarity for all ports.
Software adjustment for port impedance, port level, and battery feeding mode
(constant-voltage battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding).
The differences between the CB37ASL and the CB36ASL cards are as follows:
The CB36ASL can provide the 16/12KC charging signal.
The CB37ASL includes the CB37ASL0 and the CB37ASL1. Compared with the
CB37ASL0, the CB37ASL1 supports the remote power supply.


3-73
Note:
The meanings of BORSCHT are as follows:
B: Battery
O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test

3.17.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card, as
described in Table 355.
Table 355 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting.
RUN
ON
The power supply BAT is powered
off.

CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the
backplane.
Connect the first eight channels of POTS signals to the 1st8th pin rows on the
upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight channels of POTS signals to the 25th32nd pin rows on the
lower HEADER.

3-74
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS0+
POTS1+
POTS2+
POTS3+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS7+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-

Figure 347 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the
backplane (upper HEADER)

3-75
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-

Figure 348 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the
backplane (lower HEADER)
3.18 16-Port Analog Line CardCB38ASL
3.18.1 Overview
The CB38ASL card is the 16-port analog line card, it has the following functions:
BORSCHT.
Port backup.
Reversed polarity and 16/12KC charging signal.
Software adjustment for port impedance, port level, and battery feeding mode
(constant-voltage battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding).
Line cards compliant with different countries can be developed by modifying the
software.

3-76
Note:
B: Battery
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test

3.18.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the CB38ASL card, as described in
Table 356.
Table 356 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB38ASL card
RUN
ON
The power supply VBAT is powered
off.

Figure 349 and Figure 350 show the pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and
the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.
Connect the first eight channels of POTS signals to the 1st8th pin rows on the
upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight POTS signals to the 25th32nd pin rows on the lower
HEADER.

3-77
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS0+
POTS1+
POTS2+
POTS3+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS7+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-

Figure 349 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane(upper
HEADER)

3-78
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-

Figure 350 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
3.19 32-Port Analog Line
CardCC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL
3.19.1 Overview
The CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card is the 32-port analog line card with the
BORSCHT function. The silk screen on the front panel is A32.
The differences among the CC0HASL, CC0NASL, and CC0RASL cards are as follows.
Only ports 16 and 17 of the CC0HASL card provide the polarity reversal function.
All ports of the CC0NASL and CC0RASL cards provide the polarity reversal
function.
The feed current of the CCONASL card and that of the CC0RASL card are
20 mA and 30 mA respectively.
The following takes the CC0HASL as example to describe the 32-port analog line card.

3-79
Note:
BORSCHT is described as follows.
B: Battery
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test

3.19.2 Front Panel
CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card.
CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card
Name Meaning Status Description
Fast blinking or OFF The card is abnormal.
RUN
Running
status LED
ON
The security unit of the
card blows.
ON
At least one port of the
card is in busy state.
BSY Busy LED
OFF
All ports of the card are in
idle state.

Figure 351 shows the pin assignment between the CC0HASL card and the backplane.
(It's the rear view of the backplane.)

3-80
POTS0+
POTS1+
POTS2+
POTS3+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS7+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8+
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13+
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-


3-81
POTS24+
POTS25+
POTS26+
POTS27+
POTS28+
POTS29+
POTS30+
POTS31+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS24-
POTS25-
POTS26-
POTS27-
POTS28-
POTS29-
POTS30-
POTS31-
POTS20+
POTS20-
POTS21+
POTS21-
POTS22+
POTS22-
POTS23+
POTS23-
POTS16+
POTS16-
POTS17+
POTS17-
POTS18+
POTS18-
POTS19+
POTS19-

Figure 352 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the

Note:
Numbers in the figure refer to subscriber serial numbers.

3.20 16-Port Analog Line CardCC0KASL/CC0MASL
3.20.1 Overview
The CC0KASL/CC0MASL card is the 16-port analog line card. It has the following
functions:
BORSCHT.
Selectable A/ law coding without changing hardware.
Port impedance, port level can be adjusted by software.

3-82
The difference between the CC0MASL and the CC0KASL are as follows.
All ports of the CC0MASL card provide the polarity reversal function.
Only ports 8 and 9 of the CC0KASL card provide the polarity reversal function.

Note:
The CC0KASL has two finished cards: CC0KASL0 and CC0KASL1. Compared with
the CC0KASL0, the CC0KASL1 supports more impedance and ringing modes, and the
commands of setting the ringing and stopping howler tone. CCOKASL in the following
represents the two finished cards.
B: Battery
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test

3.20.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card, as
described in Table 358.
Table 358 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card
RUN
ON
The power supply BAT is powered
off.

CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the
backplane.

3-83
Connect the first eight subscriber cables to the 1st and 8th rows of pins on the
upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight subscriber cables to the 25th and 32nd rows of pins on the
lower HEADER.
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS0+
POTS1+
POTS2+
POTS3+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS7+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-

Figure 353 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the
backplane (upper HEADER)

3-84
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-

Figure 354 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the
backplane (lower HEADER)
3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port CardH601ATIA
3.21.1 Overview
The H601ATIA card provides six 2/4-wire E&M ports. It is slot-compatible with line
cards.
The H601ATIA card connects to the opposite H601ATIA card through the SPC. See
below for details.
1) The H601ATIA card detects the E and M signaling.
2) If the signaling is changed, the occupied channel will send it to the opposite end
through special coding.
3) The opposite H601ATIA card monitors the received signaling codes.
4) The opposite H601ATIA card controls the corresponding port to send out relative
signals.
In this way, the H601ATIA card achieves the transparent transmission of the signaling
and services.
Each port of the H601ATIA card can support the 2/4-wire voice frequency line and
1E1M signaling line, instead of 2E2M signaling line. When E and M lines are not used,

3-85
the 2/4 voice frequency line can be used independently to carry voice frequency
signals.
The voice frequency port level of the H601ATIA card can be adjusted through software.
The settings of 2/4-wire voice frequency line can be done through software
configuration and hardware jumper.
3.21.2 Front Panel
Figure 355 shows the front panel of the H601ATIA card.
Running status LED
Channel 1 busy LED
EM4 trunk port LED
AT2 trunk port LED
EM2 trunk port LED
RUN
CH1
ATIA
EM2
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
EM4
AT2
Channel 2 busy LED
Channel 3 busy LED
Channel 4 busy LED
Channel 5 busy LED
Channel 6 busy LED

Figure 355 Front panel of the H601ATIA card
Table 359 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card.
Table 359 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card

3-86

The card fails to communicate with
the host.
Blinking The channel is being connected.
CH16
ON
The channel is already connected
and can be used for conversation,
or is in conversation.
EM2 and EM4 are ON
simultaneously
The host hasn't sent the
configuration command to the
H601ATIA card.
EM2
Only EM2 is ON among EM2, EM4
and AT2
The card is configured as an EM2
trunk port.
EM4 Reserved.
AT2 Reserved.

Figure 356 shows the layout of H601ATIA card.
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
SW14
SW13 SW12
SW8 SW7 SW6
1

2

3

4
O
N
SW1
1

2

O
N
SW2
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
SW9 SW10 SW11
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW3 SW4 SW5
JP12
JP13 JP11
JP10
JP14
JP9
JP8
JP7
JP6
JP5
SS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP17
JP16
JP15
JP18
JP19
JP4
H601ATIA

Figure 356 Layout of the H601ATIA card
Table 360 describes the settings of DIP switch SW1 of the H601ATIA card.

3-87
Table 360 Settings of DIP switch SW1
Switch ON OFF
SW1-1
The WATCHDOG circuit
does not work.
WATCHDOG circuit works. It is
also the factory setting.
SW1-2
Voice frequency lines A and
B are for input.
Voice frequency lines A, B, C and
D are for input. It is also the factory
setting.

Table 361 describes the settings of DIP switch SW2 of the H601ATIA card.
Table 361 Settings of DIP switch SW2
DIP switch ON OFF
SW2 SPROM loads FPGA. CPU loads FPGA.
Note: You are required to set DIP switch SW2 of the ATI card in OFF state.

Table 362 describes the settings of DIP switches SW3SW14 of the H601ATIA card.
Table 362 Settings of DIP switches SW3SW14
DIP switch Function Meaning
Factory
setting
SW3SW8
Select the trunk
mode of the
1st6th ports.
Bits 2 and 5 are set to ON, and
others are OFF: The
corresponding ports are used
for EM2.
NA
SW9SW14
Select the voice
frequency input
mode of the
1st6th channel
ports.
Bits 1 and 4 are set to ON and
Bits 2 and 3 are OFF: Voice
frequency lines A and B are for
input.
Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to OFF,
and Bit 2 and Bit 3 are ON:
Voice frequency lines A, B, C
and D are for input.
Bits 1 and 4
are set to
OFF.
Bits 2 and 3
are set to
ON.

DIP switch SS1 is used to reset the H601ATIA card manually.
Figure 357 and Figure 358 show the pin assignment between the H601ATIA card

3-88
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
G1A
G1B
G1C
G1D
G1E1
G1E2
G1M1
G1M2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
G2A
G2B
G2C
G2D
G2E1
G2E2
G2M1
G2M2
G3A
G3B
G3C
G3D
G3E1
G3E2
G3M1
G3M2

Figure 357 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ATIA card

3-89
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
G4A
G4B
G4C
G4D
G4E1
G4E2
G4M1
G4M2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
G5A
G5B
G5C
G5D
G5E1
G5E2
G5M1
G5M2
G6A
G6B
G6C
G6D
G6E1
G6E2
G6M1
G6M2

Figure 358 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ATIA card
Table 363 lists the meanings of the signal cables.
Table 363 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA card
Signal cable Meaning
G1AG6A the 1st6th channels of Cable A
G1BG6B the 1st6th channels of Cable B
G1CG6C the 1st6th channels of Cable C
G1DG6D the 1st6th channels of Cable D
G1E1G6E1 the 1st6th channels of E1 cable
G1E2G6E2 the 1st6th channels of E2 cable
G1M1G6M1 the 1st6th channels of M1 cable
G1M2G6M2 the 1st6th channels of M2 cable

Note:
The ATIA dedicated cable shall be configured for the H601ATIA card.


3-90
3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port
CardH301CDI/CC01CDI
3.22.1 Overview
The H301CDI/CC01CDI card is the 16-port direct dial-in subscriber port card, which
realizes transparent transmission for the analog subscriber port. The
H301CDI/CC01CDI card is compatible with the line card slot, and uses the same cable
as the 16- port ASL card.
3.22.2 Front Panel
Figure 359 shows the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card.
Running status LED
Channel busy LEDs
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CD I / a

Figure 359 Front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card
Table 364 describes the details of the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card.

3-91
Table 364 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card
The card fails to communicate
with the host.
RUN
0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF for 3s The card self-test fails.
CH015 ON
The corresponding channel is
occupied.

3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane
H301CDI/CC01CDI card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the
backplane.
Connect the first eight channels of direct dial-in signals to the 1st8th pin rows on
the upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight channels of direct dial-in signals to the 25th32nd pin rows
on the lower HEADER.

3-92
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
R 0
R 1
R 2
R 3
R 4
R 5
R 6
R 7
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7

Figure 360 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
R 8
R 9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15

Figure 361 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card

3-93
3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line CardH601CSLB
3.23.1 Overview
The H603CSLB card is the POTS and ADSL combo line card with the built-in splitter.
The H601CSLB card provides 16 ADSL ports and 16 POTS ports. The ADSL ports and
the POTS ports are managed by two control units, so the two types of ports will not
affect each other either on services or on management. Where, the 16 POTS ports
support the reversal polarity function.
3.23.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the H601CSLB board, as described in
Table 365.
Table 365 Description of front panel of the H601CSLB card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is being powered on.
ON
The 48V power supply of the
POTS access module is abnormal
(no feedback or extra low voltage.)
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s
Continuous ON for several
seconds

The POTS service is abnormal.
The control unit of POTS access
module is reset repeatedly.
RUN
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for more
than 8s
The POTS access module is
normal, and the ADSL access
module works abnormally.

Note:
The LED on the H601CSLB card mainly indicates the narrowband service status. It can
not indicate the broadband service status in the case of narrowband functions failure.
Therefore, the broadband service status shall be queried at the maintenance terminals.

Refer to Table 366 for the jumper settings of the H601CSLB card.

3-94
Table 366 Jumper settings of the H601CSLB card
Jumper Status Meaning Description
S1 Open
For the upgrade
loading of board
software of the POTS
access module
It is open by default. Connect it with
the short-circuiter before the
software loading, and disconnect it
after the loading.
S5 Open
For the upgrade
loading of board
software of the ADSL
access module
It is open by default. Connect it with
the short-circuiter before the
software loading, and disconnect it
after the loading.

Figure 362 and Figure 363 show the pin assignment between the H601CSLA card
and backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.
Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 1st8th
pin rows on the upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the
25th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

3-95
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B 0
B 1
B 2
B 3
B 4
B 5
B 6
B 7

Figure 362 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-96
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B 8
B 9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

Figure 363 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line CardH601CSLI
3.24.1 Overview
The H601CSLI card is the POTS and ADSL combo line card. It supports circuit and
loop line test, port backup functions and has the splitter.
The H601CSLI card provides 16 ADSL ports and 16 POTS ports, which are controlled
by two control units respectively.
The 16 POTS ports support the full reversal polarity, like the functions of the ASL card.
3.24.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601CSLI card, as described in
Table 367.
Table 367 Description of the front panel of the H601CSLI card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is being powered on.

3-97
ON
The 48V power supply of the
(no feedback or extra low
voltage).
Continuous ON for several
seconds

Te POTS service is abnormal.
The control unit of POTS access
module is reset repeatedly.

than 8s
The POTS service is normal, and
the ADSL access module works
abnormally.

Note:
The RUN LED on the front panel of the H601CSLI card mainly indicates the
narrowband service status, and cannot indicate the broadband service status normally
in the case of narrowband service module failure. In this case, you can query the
broadband service status through the maintenance terminals.

Table 368 shows the settings of jumpers S1 and S5 of the H601CSLI card.
Table 368 Jumper settings of the H601CSLI card
S1 Open
For the upgrade
loading of card
software of the POTS
access module
It is open by default. Make it short
circuited before software loading,
and recover it after the loading.
S5 Open
For the upgrade
loading of card
software of the ADSL
access module
It is open by default. Its usage is the
same as jumper S1.

Note:
S1 and S5 settings are as follows:

3-98

Figure 364 and Figure 365 show the pin assignment between the H601CSLI card
Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 1st8th
pin rows on the upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B 0
B 1
B 2
B 3
B 4
B 5
B 6
B 7

Figure 364 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-99
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B 8
B 9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

Figure 365 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)
3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line
CardH602CSMB
3.25.1 Overview
The H602CSMB card is the POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ combo line card with the built-in
splitter.
The H602CSMB card provides 16 ADSL/ADSL2+ ports and 16 POTS ports. The ADSL
ports and the POTS ports are managed by two control units, so the two types of ports
will not affect each other either on services or on management. Where, POTS ports 7
and 8 support the reversal polarity function.
The H602CSMB card supports the circuit and loop line test by configuring a test relay
card.
3.25.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card, as described in
Table 369.

3-100
Table 369 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card
ON
The 48 V power supply of the
(no feedback or extra low voltage.)
Continuous ON for several seconds

The POTS service is abnormal. The
control unit of POTS access module
is reset repeatedly.
RUN
than 8s
The POTS service is normal, but the
ADSL access module works
abnormally.

Note:
The RUN LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card mainly indicates the
narrowband service status, and cannot indicate the broadband service status normally
in case of narrowband service module failure. In this case, you can query the
broadband service status through the maintenance terminals.

Table 370 shows the settings of jumpers S1 and S5 of the H602CSMB card.
Table 370 Jumper settings of the H602CSMB/H602CSMC card
S1 Open
For the upgrade loading
of card software of the
POTS access module
It is open by default. Short-circuit it
before software loading, and
recover it after the loading.
S5 Open
For the upgrade loading
of card software of the
ADSL access module
It is open by default. Short-circuit it
before software loading, and
recover it after the loading.

Figure 366 and Figure 367 show the pin assignment between the H602CSMB card

3-101
Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL2+ combo signals to the
1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.
Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL2+ combo signals to the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B 0
B 1
B 2
B 3
B 4
B 5
B 6
B 7

Figure 366 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-102
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B 8
B 9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

Figure 367 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
CardH603CSMB/H603CSMC
3.26.1 Overview
The H603CSMB/H603CSMC card is the 16-port POTS and 16-port ADSL/ADSL2+
combo line card.
ADSL/ADSL2+ services are sent to the broadband control card through the backplane,
and then sent to the ATM/IP network by the control card. POTS services are sent to the
narrowband control card through the HW bus, and then sent to the LE through the E1
port.
The H603CSMB/H603CSMC card has the following features:
Provides the built-in splitter.
Supports the circuit and loop line test.
Works in the hot backup mode.
3.26.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.
Table 371 describes the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.

3-103
Table 371 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC
card
repeatedly
The card is being powered on.
ON
48 V power supply of the POTS
access unit is abnormal (no feed
or undervoltage).
ON for 2s

POTS service is abnormal. The
main control unit of the POTS
access unit keeps resetting.
RUN:
running
status
LED
than 8s
POTS service is normal, but
ADSL access unit is abnormal.

Figure 368 shows the jumpers of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.
H603CSMC
S2
S1

Figure 368 Jumpers of the H603CSMC card
Table 372 describes the settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card.

3-104
Table 372 Settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card
CLOSE
The card is enabled to load the software of the ADSL
access module.
S1
OPEN
The card is disabled from loading the software of the
ADSL access module. It is also the factory setting.
CLOSE The card can be reset.
S2
OPEN The card cannot be reset. It is also the factory setting.

Note:
S1 and S2 settings are as follows:

Figure 369 and Figure 370 show the pin assignment between the H603CSMC card

3-105
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 369 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card

3-106
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

Figure 370 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CMSC card
CardH603CSRB
3.27.1 Overview
The H603CSRB card is the 32-port POTS and 16-port ADSL/ADSL2+ combo line card.
It communicates with the broadband control card through the LVDS serial interface,
and the control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services.
3.27.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card, as described in
Table 371.

3-107
Table 373 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card is performing self-test.
2s ON and 2s OFF repeatedly The card is normal. RUN
ON The card is abnormal.

Figure 368 shows the jumpers of the H603CSRB card.
H603CSRB
S1
S2

Figure 371 Layout of the H603CSRB card
Table 374 describes settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card.
Table 374 Settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card
CLOSE The cards works in narrowband loading mode.
S1
OPEN The card runs normally. It is also the factory setting.
CLOSE The card works in broadband loading mode.
S2
OPEN The card runs normally. It is also the factory setting.


3-108
Note:
Settings of jumpers S1 and S2:
CLOSE: The jumpers are short-circuited.
OPEN: The jumpers disconnect.

Figure 369 and Figure 370 show the pin assignment between the H603CSRB card
The numbers in Figure 369 and Figure 370 are port serial numbers.
Connect the subscriber cables as follows:
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0
4 1
4 2
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 7
5 8
5 9
6 0
6 1
6 2
6 3
6 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
6 5
6 6
6 7
6 8
6 9
7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 4
7 5
7 6
7 7
7 8
7 9
8 0
8 1
8 2
8 3
8 4
8 5
8 6
8 7
8 8
8 9
9 0
9 1
9 2
9 3
9 4
9 5
9 6
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3- R
R4- R
T7- R
R8- R
T4- R
T8- R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B 8
A9
B 9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
B 0
B 1
B 2
B 3
B 4
B 5
B 6
B 7

Figure 372 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSRB card

3-109
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A24
A16
B16
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23

Figure 373 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSRB card
3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port CardH601DEHA
3.28.1 Overview
The H601DEHA card is the 16-port circuit emulation E1 port card.
The H601DEHA card provides independent 16 E1 ports, and supports the unstructured
data transfer (UDT) CES. Each port supports system clock, line clock and Time Stamp
clock. The clock of each port is independent of others.
The H601DEHA card is installed in the line card slot in the UA5000 frame. It is
recommended that up to two DEHA cards be installed in one UA5000 frame.
The H601DEHA card provides E1 private line access service and TDM E1 access
service.
I. E1 private line access
The H601DEHA card supports private line access service through E1 channels. The
UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and then the MD5500 restores the ATM
cells back to E1 signals and sends them to the DDN node. The private line access
service here is like the extension of DDN private line service.
Another application of the private line access service is to connect two E1 nodes at one
or two UA5000s directly, without passing through the upper-layer equipment. This

3-110
application can be looked as a feature of the transmission system, where two tributary
interfaces are connected directly.
II. TDM E1 access
The H601DEHA card accesses TDM services through E1 channels. The UA5000
adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells. Then, the MD5500 restores the ATM cells back
into E1 signals and sends them to the LE. The TDM E1 access can be looked as the
trunk access of voice services.
3.28.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601DEHA card, as described in
Table 375.
Table 375 Description of the LED ON the front panel of the H601DEHA card
RUN

3.28.3 DIP Switches
Figure 374 shows the layout of the H601DEHA card.
H601DEHA
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S5
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S6
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S4
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8
ON
S3
S8
1 2 3 4

Figure 374 Layout of the H601DEHA card

3-111
I. DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6
These switches are used to set whether to ground the shielding layer at the Tx or Rx
end of the E1 port. Table 376 shows their settings and meanings.
Table 376 Settings and meanings of DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6
DIP switch ON OFF Factory setting
S1 1-4#E1 Grounded Not grounded ON
Remarks:
Every DIP switch contains eight bits for controlling four E1 ports.
The grounding for the shielding layer of every E1 port is controlled by two bits: the
first one is for Tx, and the second one is for Rx.

II. DIP switches S3 and S4
DIP switches S3 and S4 are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 Rx end,
as shown in Table 377.
Table 377 Settings of DIP switches S3 and S4
Control 1#E1 S3-1 75-ohm 120-ohm ON

3-112

for transmission.
III. DIP switch S8
DIP switch S8 is used to indicate the E1 port impedance, as shown in Table 378.
Table 378 Settings of DIP switch S8
S8-1 75-ohm 120-ohm ON
S8-2-4 Reserved

Caution:
The setting of DIP switch will take effect after you reset the card.
The impedances for all the 16 E1 ports on the card must be the same, either
120-ohm or 75-ohm, which shall be consistent with the DIP switch S8-1.

Figure 375 and Figure 376 show the pin assignment between the H601DEHA card

3-113
I1B I1A I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
73
77
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RT1
TT1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
41
45
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
-48V
-48V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RR9
RT9
TR9
TT9
RR10
RT10
TR10
TT10
RR11
RT11
TR11
TT11
RR12
RT12
TR12
TT12

Figure 375 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601DEHA card
I1B I1A I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
73
77
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RT5
TT5
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
41
45
44
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
RT6
TT6
R67
T67
RT8
TT8
RR5
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
TR7
RR8
TR8
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND
PGND
RR13
RT13
TR13
TT13
RR14
RT14
TR14
TT14
RR15
RT15
TR15
TT15
RR16
RT16
TR16
TT16
GND
GND
GND
GND
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND
PGND
GND
GND
GND
GND

Figure 376 Signal definition of lower HEADER on the H601DEHA card

3-114
In Figure 375 and Figure 376:
RR116: Channels 116 of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the signal
received at the H601DEHA.
RT116: Channels 116 of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the signal received
at the H601DEHA.
TR116: Channels 116 of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the signal sent
from the H601DEHA.
TT116: Channels 116 of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the signal sent from
the H601DEHA.
3.29 8-Port Digital Line CardCB02DSL/CB03DSL
3.29.1 Overview
The CB02DSL/CB03DSL card is the digital line card that provides eight ISDN BRA
(2B+D) ports.
The CB02DSL card can not supply the power remotely while the CB03DSL card can.
The digital line card is slot-compatible with the analog line card.
The card provides:
Standard ISDN BRA services
TA128 semi-permanent connection mode
MTA access mode
U-port transparent transmission access mode
The 8 U ports in the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card can be configured to different working
modes.
The CB03DSL card can provide the power supply to subscriber terminals. It controls
the DC power supply of eight ports through the remote power control circuit. The
provision of power supply can be set by ports through configuration at the background.
The power supply circuit has the functions of overcurrent detection and automatic
protection. The automatic recovery of power supply can be implemented through the
software control.
3.29.2 Front Panel
Figure 377 shows the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card.

3-115
Running status LED
Serial port communication LED
Port 0 active LED
RUN
DSL
Port 1 active LED
Port 2 active LED
Port 3 active LED
Port 4 active LED
Port 5 active LED
Port 6 active LED
Port 7 active LED

Figure 377 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card
Table 379 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card.
Table 379 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card
repeatedly
The card is requesting the
configuration information to the
control card.
RUN
ON Activated.
OFF Deactivated.
Port
07
repeatedly
Activating the U port.

3-116
repeatedly
Activating the S/T port.
COM 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly
The master and slave nodes
communicate for 160 times.

The eight channels of subscriber signals provides by the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card are
connected with the 1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in
Figure 378. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.
The numbers in Figure 378 are the port serial numbers.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 378 Pin assignment of upper HEADER of the DSL card

3-117
3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line CardCB05DSL
3.30.1 Overview
The CB05DSL card is the ISDN 2B+D line card that provides eight subscriber ports
(Ports U1 to U8). The CB05DSL card resides in the subscriber frame.
The CB05DSL card has the following features:
When the backup function is needed, the CB05DSL card can provide seven active
subscriber ports and one standby subscriber port.
It processes the ISDN LAPD (Q.921) protocol for the eight ports.
It is used for the CENTREX console access service.
It supports reading the electronic bar code.
3.30.2 Front Panel
Figure 379 shows the front panel of the CB05DSL card.

3-118
RUN
DSL
Running status LED
Serial port communication LED
Port 8 active LED
Port 1 active LED
Port 2 active LED
Port 3 active LED
Port 4 active LED
Port 5 active LED
Port 6 active LED
Port 7 active LED

Figure 379 Front panel of the CB05DSL card
Table 380 describes the details on the front panel of the CB05DSL card.
Table 380 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB05DSL card
The card is requesting
configuration information from the
main control card.
RUN
ON The port is activated.
OFF The port is deactivated.
repeatedly
Activating the U port.
Port
18
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Activating the S/T port.

3-119
ON
Serial port communication is
normal.
COM

The eight channels of subscriber signals provided by the CB05DSL card are connected
with the 1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 380. The figure is
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 380 Pin assignment between the CB05DSL card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-120
3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit CardH601EAUA
3.31.1 Overview
The H601EAUA card is the Ethernet access unit card. It has the following functions:
Provides eight FE ports.
Provides flow control and L2 switching at wire speed for upstream ATM traffic.
Supports up to six groups of port bindings, 8K MAC address self-learning, and 256
802.1Q VLANs.
Supports binding the MAC address with the port.
Supports broadcast storm suppression.
3.31.2 Front Panel
Figure 381 shows the front panel of the H601EAUA card.
Running status LED
Port link LED
Port running LED
EAUA
ACT0
LINK0
ACT1
LINK1
ACT2
LINK2
ACT3
LINK3
ACT4
LINK4
ACT5
LINK5
ACT6
LINK6
ACT7
LINK7
RUN

Figure 381 Front panel of the H601EAUA card

3-121
Table 381 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card.
Table 381 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card
RUN
repeatedly
The system is starting.
OFF The link is not connected.
LINK
ON The link is connected.
OFF No data is transmitted.
ACT
Blinking There is data being transmitted.

Figure 382 and Figure 383 show the pin assignment between the H601EAUA card
In Figure 382 and Figure 383, "T" represents transmission, "R" represents reception,
and numerals after "XA" represents serial number of the FE port. For example,
"FETX0-" indicates "Tx of the first FE port-".

3-122
B A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FERX0+
FETX0+
FERX0-
FETX0-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FERX1+
FETX1+
FERX1-
FETX1-
FERX2+
FETX2+
FERX2-
FETX2-
FERX3+
FETX3+
FERX3-
FETX3-

Figure 382 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601EAUA card

3-123
B A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FERX4+
FETX4+
FERX4-
FETX4-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FERX5+
FETX5+
FERX5-
FETX5-
FERX6+
FETX6+
FERX6-
FETX6-
FERX7+
FETX7+
FERX7-
FETX7-

Figure 383 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601EAUA card
3.32 2-Port High Speed Line CardH302HSL
3.32.1 Overview
The H302HSL card is the synchronous high-speed line card. It provides two V.35 ports
and two E1 ports at the rate of N x 64kbit/s (1 N 31).
When internal HW resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the
V.35 port is 25 x 64 kbit/s.
When E1 ports are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35 port is 31 x
64 kbit/s.
The E1 port on the card can be connected with the remote data service unit to:
Access the remote N x 64 kbit/s data service, or
Serve as the trunk channel to carry N x 64 kbit/s data service.
When the E1 port is used for trunking, the N x 64 kbit/s data will be transmitted through
E1 ports, without occupying the HW resources.
The card can lock the phase of different clock sources, including the clock provided by
ST-BUS in the subscriber frame or the clock extracted from the E1 port.
The H302HSL card has the digital cross-connection function, with the exchange
capability of six HW time slots.

3-124
Note:
The H302HSL works in the data connection equipment (DCE) mode. When the DTE is
required, the DCE-DTE conversion connector will convert the DCE to DTE, but the HSL
card still works in DCE mode.

3.32.2 Front Panel
Figure 384 shows the front panel of the H302HSL card.
RUN
TXD0
Running status LED
RXD1
TXD1
LFA0
LOS0
LFA1
LOS1
RXD0
E1 signal LED
HSL
Receiving data LED for the 1st V.35 port
Frame out-of-sync. LED for the 1st E1 port
LINK
Transmitting data LED for the 1st V.35 port
Receiving data LED for the 2nd V.35 port
Transmitting data LED for the 2nd V.35 port
Loss of signal LED for the 1st E1 port
Frame out-of-sync. LED for the 2nd E1 port
Loss of signal LED for the 2nd E1 port

Figure 384 Front panel of the H302HSL card
Table 382 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card.

3-125
Table 382 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Card power-on, self-test.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card self-test is passed.
ON V.35 port is receiving data.
RXD0-1
OFF V.35 port is not receiving data.
ON V.35 port is sending data.
TXD0-1
OFF V.35 port is not sending data.
ON Frame out-of-sync.
LFA0-1
OFF Normal.
ON Loss of signal.
LOS0-1
OFF Normal.
LINK ON
A signal exists over any E1 on the
card.

Figure 385 shows the layout of the H302HSL card.
H302HSL
S1
1

2

3

4

O
N
SW4

1

2

3

4

O
N
SW1
1

2

3

4

O
N
SW5
1

2

3

4

O
N
SW2
1

2

3

4

O
N
SW3
1 2 3
JP1
JP2
JP3

Figure 385 Layout of the H302HSL card

3-126
Table 383 describes the settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card.
Table 383 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card
DIP
switch/
Jumper
Function Meaning Default setting
SW4
Selecting the
working mode
of the first V.35
port.
SW4-1 and SW4-2 are ON, and
SW4-3 and SW4-4 are OFF: the
first V.35 port works in the DCE
mode.
SW4-1 and
SW4-2 are ON.
SW4-3 and
SW4-4 are OFF.
SW5
Selecting the
working mode
of the second
V.35 port.
SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON, and
SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF: the
second V.35 port works in the
DCE mode.
SW5-1 and
SW5-2 are ON.
SW5-3 and
SW5-4 are OFF.
SW1,
SW3
Setting the
impedance of
the first E1 port
SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW3-1 are
ON: the first E1 port uses the
75-ohm matching impedance.
OFF: the second E1 port uses
the 120-ohm matching
impedance.
SW1-3 is ON: Receiving ring
connects to PGND.
SW1-4 is ON: Sending ring
connects to PGND.
SW1-1 and
SW1-2 are ON.
SW1-3 and
SW1-4 are OFF.
SW3-1 is ON.
SW2,
SW3
Setting the
impedance of
the second E1
port
ON: the second E1 port uses
the 75-ohm matching
impedance.
SW2-1 and SW2-2 and SW3-2
are OFF: the second E1 port
uses the 120-ohm matching
impedance.
SW2-3 is ON: Receiving ring
connects to PGND.
SW2-4 is ON: Sending ring
connects to PGND.
SW2-1, SW2-2
and SW3-2 are
ON.
SW2-3 and
SW2-4 are OFF.
JP1JP3
Determining
the logic
loading mode
JP1 short connects JP2: Load
through PROM.
JP2 short connects JP3: Load
through CPU.
JP2 and JP3 are
short circuited.

The pin assignment between card and backplane is as follows:

3-127
The 1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER are for the first V.35 port and the first
E1 port. The E1 port corresponds to the 7th and 8th pin rows.
The 25th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER are for the second V.35 port and
the second E1 port. The E1 port corresponds to the 31st and 32nd rows of pins.
3.33 2-Port High Speed Line CardH303HSL
3.33.1 Overview
The H303HSL card is the synchronous high-speed line card. Compatible with the high
layer protocol of H302HSL, H303HSL can be applied directly in the environment for
H302HSL.
The H303HSL card provides two E1 ports and two SHDSL ports. After the modem
conversion, the two SHDSL ports can function as two V.35 ports (N x 64 kbit/s, 3 N
31) or two E1 (2048 kbit/s) ports.
The H303ASL card has the following two functions.
I. User service data transmission through SPC
1) Inter-card SPC
After the inter-card SPC is established, the user data borne by the SHDSL port can be
transmitted to RSP or PVU8/PVU4 frame over HW, and then transmitted over E1
channels. In this case, the maximum available transmission rate at the SHDSL port is
26 x 64 kbit/s (for the RSP frame) or 28 x 64kbit/s (for the PVU8/PVU4 frame).
2) Intra-card SPC
After the intra-card SPC (between the SHDSL port and E1 port of the card) is
established, the user data borne by the SHDSL port can be transmitted directly over E1
port of the card. In this case, the maximum available rate at the SHDSL port is 31 x 64
kbit/s.
II. Clock locking
The H303HSL card can lock clock signals from E1 port or from the HW of the backplane.
Therefore, the H303HSL card can work in the environment where the PSTN clock and
the DDN clock are not synchronized with each other.
For the E1 access, the H303HSL card shall lock the E1 clock signals.
For the HW access, the H303HSL card shall lock the HW clock signals.
Moreover, the MD5500 system clock shall be synchronized to the DDN clock.
3.33.2 Front Panel
Figure 386 shows the front panel of the H303HSL card.

3-128
Running status LED
The 1st SHDSL port LED
Reset button
Debug serial port
RUN
WAN1
C
O
M
WAN2
E1-1
E1-2
RESET
HSL/T
The 2nd SHDSL port LED
The 1st E1 port status LED
The 2nd E1 port status LED

Figure 386 Front panel of the H303HSL card
Table 384 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card.
Table 384 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card
repeatedly
The card is powered on and is
performing the self-test.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The self-test is passed.
The SHDSL port is in the training
status.
ON
The SHDSL port is in the normal
operation.
WAN1/
WAN2
OFF The SHDSL port is deactivated.

3-129
ON
The E1 port is in the normal
operation.
OFF
The E1 port has LOS or service is
interrupted.
E1-1/
E1-2
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The LFA alarm occurs.
Note: All LEDs are OFF except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the card software is to
run.

Table 385 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL card.
Table 385 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL
card
RESET The button is used to reset the card manually.
COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9600 bit/s.

Figure 387 shows the layout of the H303HSL card.
H303HSL
1

2

3

4ON
S7
1

2

3

4
ON
1

2

3

4
ON
S3
S4

Figure 387 Layout of the H303HSL card

3-130
Table 386 Settings of DIP switches on the H303HSL card
DIP
switch
Function Meaning Default setting
S3
Impedance
setting
switch for
first E1 port
Bits 14 ON: The first E1 port
adopts the 75-ohm matching
impedance.
Bits 14 OFF: The first E1 port
impedance.
Bits 14: ON
S4
Impedance
setting
switch for
second E1
port
Bits 14 ON: The second E1 port
impedance.
Bits 14 OFF: The second E1 port
impedance.
Bits 14: ON
S7
SHDSL port
working
mode
Bit 1 ON: The SHDSL port is set to
the E1 working mode.
Bit 1 OFF: The SHDSL port is set to
the V.35 working mode.
Bits 24: reserved.
Bits 14: ON

Note:
The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port.
When the port works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
When the port works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter
the activation distance is.
When N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km. When N is 32, the maximum
transmission distance is 3 km. The line quality shall also be taken into account.

The two channels of E1 signals provided by the H303HSL card are connected with the
1st4th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 388.
The two channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H303HSL card are connected with
the 31st32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 389.
The characters in Figure 388 and Figure 389 are described as follows:
The first letters R and T indicate receiving and transmitting respectively.
The second letters R and T indicate "ring" and "tip" respectively.
The numeral indicates the E1 serial number.
Letters A and B indicate lines A and B of the SHDSL subscriber cables
respectively.

3-131
The numbers are the serial numbers of the subscriber cable.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
TT0
RT0
TT1
RT1
TR0
RR0
TR1
RR1

Figure 388 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H303HSL card

3-132
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R LINEA1
LINEA0
LINEB1
LINEB0

Figure 389 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H303HSL card
3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 CardH521SDL
3.34.1 Overview
The H601SDLB card is the SHDSL and E1 line card. The H521SDL card provides the
SHDSL service access in the TDM mode. Each H521SDL card provides four E1 ports
and four SHDSL ports.
After converted by a modem, the four SHDSL ports can work as V35 ports (N x 64 kbit/s,
1 N 31) or E1 ports (2048 kbit/s).
According to the configuration, the H521SDL card can track the clock of different ports,
including HW port, trunk port and SHDSL port at subscriber side. The SHDSL ports of
the H521SDL card may be configured flexibly for various applications. The SHDSL port
card can report the port status.

3-133
3.34.2 Front Panel
Figure 390 shows the front panel of the H521SDL card.
RUN
C
O
M
SDL
WAN1
WAN2
WAN3
WAN4
E1-1
E1-2
E1-3
E1-4
RST
Reset button
Debug serial port
Running status LED
The 1st SHDSL port LED
The 2nd SHDSL port LED
The 1st E1 port status LED
The 2nd E1 port status LED
The 3rd SHDSL port LED
The 4th SHDSL port LED
The 3rd E1 port status LED
The 4th E1 port status LED

Figure 390 Front panel of the H521SDL card
Table 387 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card.
Table 387 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card
repeatedly
The card is powered on and is
performing the self-test.
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card has not registered.
RUN
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card runs normally
WAN1
WAN4
The SHDSL port is in the training
status.

3-134
ON
The SHDSL port is in the normal
operation.
ON
The E1 port is in the normal
operation.
OFF
The E1 port has LOS or service is
interrupted.
E1-1
E1-4
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The LFA alarm occurs.
Note: All LEDs are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the card software is to
run.

Table 388 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL card.
Table 388 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL
card
COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9600 bit/s.

Figure 391 shows the layout of the H521SDL card.

3-135
H521SDL
1

2

3

4
ON
1

2

3

4
ON
1

2

3

4
ON
1

2

3

4
ON
S3
S4
S5
S6
1

2

3

4ON
S7

Figure 391 Layout of the H521SDL card
Table 389 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL card
DIP
switch
Function Meaning
Default
setting
S3
Impedance
setting switch for
first E1 port
Bits 14 ON: 75-ohm matching
impedance.
Bits 14 OFF: 120-ohm matching
impedance.
ON
S4
Impedance
setting switch for
second E1 port
impedance.
impedance.
ON
S5
Impedance
setting switch for
third E1 port
impedance.
impedance.
ON
S6
Impedance
setting switch for
fourth E1 port
impedance.
impedance.
ON
S7
SHDSL port
working mode
Bit 1 ON: E1 mode.
Bit 1 OFF: V.35 working mode.
Bit 2 ON: Master mode.
Bit 2 OFF: Slave mode.
Bits 34: reserved.
ON

3-136
Note:
After the working mode of the SHDSL port is set through the software, the working
mode selection of the DIP switch S7-1 will be disabled.
When the H521SDL works in the slave mode, only ports 0 and 2 are available, and
ports 1 and 3 are unavailable.
The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port:
In the E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
In the V.35 mode, the activation distance will be shorter if the port rate is higher.
When N = 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km; when N=32, it is 3 km. Line
quality shall be considered in the actual application, shorten the distance as much as
possible when you configure the terminal.

The four channels of E1 signals provided by the H521SDL card are connected with the
1st8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 392.
The four channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H521SDL card are connected with
the 29th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 393.

Note:
Two AMP connectors of the H521SDL are bundled together. One cable can be
connected to two H521SDL cards. Cable color and labels of one AMP connector are
different from those of the other AMP connector.

In Figure 392 and Figure 393, the characters are described as follows:
The first letters R and T indicate receiving and transmitting respectively.
The second letters R and T indicate "ring" and "tip" respectively.
Letters A and B indicate lines A and B of the SHDSL subscriber cables
respectively.
The numbers are the serial numbers of the subscriber cable.

3-137
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
TT1
RT1
TT2
RT2
TT3
TT0
RT0
RT3
TR1
RR1
TR2
RR2
TR3
TR0
RR0
RR3

Figure 392 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H521SDL card

3-138
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
LINEA0
LINEA1
LINEA2
LINEA3
LINEB0
LINEB1
LINEB2
LINEB3

Figure 393 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H521SDL card
3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line CardH601SDLB
3.35.1 Overview
The H601SDLB card is the 16-port SHDSL line card, which provides the SHDSL
access services in the ATM mode.
After converted by a modem, the SHDSL port can work as a Fast Ethernet (FE) port.
The H601SDLB card has the following features:
It supports the port backup function.
It transmits the upstream services through the broadband control card.
3.35.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card, as described in
Table 390.

3-139
Table 390 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is under self-test.

Figure 394 and Figure 395 show the pin assignment between the H601SDLB card
Connect the first eight subscriber signals to the 1st8th pin rows on the upper
HEADER.
Connect the last eight subscriber signals to the 25th32nd pin rows on the lower
HEADER.
LINEA0
LINEA1
LINEA2
LINEA3
LINEA4
LINEA5
LINEA6
LINEA7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINEB0
LINEB1
LINEB2
LINEB3
LINEB4
LINEB5
LINEB6
LINEB7

Figure 394 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-140
LINEA8
LINEA9
LINEA10
LINEA11
LINEA12
LINEA13
LINEA14
LINEA15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINEB8
LINEB9
LINEB10
LINEB11
LINEB12
LINEB13
LINEB14
LINEB15

Figure 395 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line CardH601SDLT
3.36.1 Overview
The H601SDLT card is the 16-port SHDSL line card, which provides the SHDSL access
services in the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) mode.
After converted by a modem, the SHDSL port can work as a V.35 (N x 64kbit/s, 1 N
31) or E1 (2048 kbit/s port.

Note:
The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port.
When the port works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
When the port works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter
the activation distance is.
When N = 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km. When N is 32, the maximum
transmission distance is 3 km. The line quality shall also be taken into account.
The H601SDLT card and the RSUG shall work in the consistent mode.

3-141
The H601SDLT card has the following features:
It can work in the master mode only.
It synchronizes to different clocks according to the data configuration, including the
HW port clock and the local card clock.
Each SHDSL port can work in independent application mode (E1 or V.35).
It supports reporting each line port status.
The H601SDLT card resides in the line card slot of the UA5000 high-density frame,
working with the narrowband control card (PVU8, PVU4, and PVM).
3.36.2 Front Panel
Figure 396 shows the front panel of the H601SDLT card
Running status LED
SHDSL LEDs
Reset button
Debug serial port
RUN
WAN1
SDLT
RST
COM
WAN2
WAN3
WAN4
WAN5
WAN6
WAN7
WAN8

Figure 396 Front panel of the H601SDLT card
Table 391 describes the front panel of the H601SDLT card.

3-142
Table 391 Description of the front panel of the H601SDLT card
repeatedly
The card is powered on and
performing self-test.
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is registering.
RUN
The SHDSL port is in training
state.
ON The SHDSL port is normal.
WAN1
WAN8
RESET NA
The button used to reset the card
manually.
COM NA
RS-232 for local maintenance.
The default setting is 9,600 bit/s.
Note: All LEDs are off except WAN1 when the software is being loaded or is ready to run.

Table 392 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT card.
Table 392 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT
card
RESET The button used to reset the card manually.
COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9,600 bit/s.

The eight channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H601SDLT card are connected
with the 25th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 397. The
figure is seen from the rear of the backplane

3-143
LINEA0
LINEA1
LINEA2
LINEA3
LINEA4
LINEA5
LINEA6
LINEA7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINEB0
LINEB1
LINEB2
LINEB3
LINEB4
LINEB5
LINEB6
LINEB7

Figure 397 Pin assignment of the H601SDLT card on the lower HEADER
3.37 16-Port VDSL Line CardH601VDLA
3.37.1 Overview
The H601VDLA card is a 16-port VDSL line card. It has the following functions:
Embedded splitter
3.37.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card, as described in
Table 393.
Table 393 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card
RUN


3-144
The 16 channels of VDSL signals provided by the H601VDLA card are connected with
the 1st16th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 398. The figure is
The 16 channels of POTS signals provided by the H601VDLA card are connected with
the 17th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 399. The figure is
LINE0+
LINE1+
LINE2+
LINE3+
LINE4+
LINE5+
LINE6+
LINE7+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINE0-
LINE1-
LINE2-
LINE3-
LINE4-
LINE5-
LINE6-
LINE7-
LINE8+
LINE8-
LINE9+
LINE9-
LINE10+
LINE10-
LINE11+
LINE11-
LINE12+
LINE12-
LINE13+
LINE13-
LINE14+
LINE14-
LINE15+
LINE15-

Figure 398 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA card

3-145
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0
4 1
4 2
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 7
5 8
5 9
6 0
6 1
6 2
6 3
6 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
6 5
6 6
6 7
6 8
6 9
7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 4
7 5
7 6
7 7
7 8
7 9
8 0
8 1
8 2
8 3
8 4
8 5
8 6
8 7
8 8
8 9
9 0
9 1
9 2
9 3
9 4
9 5
9 6
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-
POTS4+
POTS4-
POTS5+
POTS5-
POTS6+
POTS6-
POTS7+
POTS7-
POTS0+
POTS0-
POTS1+
POTS1-
POTS2+
POTS2-
POTS3+
POTS3-

Figure 399 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA card
3.38 16-Port VDSL Line CardH601VDLB
3.38.1 Overview
The H601VDLB card is the 16-port VDSL line card.
he H601VDLB card has the following features:
It provides the 16-channel VDSL subscriber port.
It has the built-in splitter.
It supports the port backup function.
3.38.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card, as described in
Table 394.

3-146
Table 394 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card
0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF repeatedly The card is starting. RUN

The 16 channels of VDSL signals provided by the H601VDLB card are connected with
the 1st16th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3100. The figure is
The 16 channels of POTS signals provided by the H601VDLB card are connected with
the 17th32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3101. The figure is
LINE0+
LINE1+
LINE2+
LINE3+
LINE4+
LINE5+
LINE6+
LINE7+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINE0-
LINE1-
LINE2-
LINE3-
LINE4-
LINE5-
LINE6-
LINE7-
LINE8+
LINE8-
LINE9+
LINE9-
LINE10+
LINE10-
LINE11+
LINE11-
LINE12+
LINE12-
LINE13+
LINE13-
LINE14+
LINE14-
LINE15+
LINE15-

Figure 3100 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLB card

3-147
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0
4 1
4 2
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 7
5 8
5 9
6 0
6 1
6 2
6 3
6 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
6 5
6 6
6 7
6 8
6 9
7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 4
7 5
7 6
7 7
7 8
7 9
8 0
8 1
8 2
8 3
8 4
8 5
8 6
8 7
8 8
8 9
9 0
9 1
9 2
9 3
9 4
9 5
9 6
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-
POTS4+
POTS4-
POTS5+
POTS5-
POTS6+
POTS6-
POTS7+
POTS7-
POTS0+
POTS0-
POTS1+
POTS1-
POTS2+
POTS2-
POTS3+
POTS3-

Figure 3101 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLB card
3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port CardCB02VFB
3.39.1 Overview
The CB02VFB card is the voice frequency port card. It provides sixteen 2-wire or eight
4-wire voice frequency ports. It is slot-compatible with other line cards.
The card implements the conversion between the 2-wire and 4-wire signals and adjusts
the gain under the control of software. However, it does not provide feeding, ringing and
on-hook detection functions.
3.39.2 Front Panel
There is a RUN LED in the front panel of the CB02VFB card, as described in
Table 395.

3-148
Table 395 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB02VFB card
RUN
Fast blinking or OFF The card works abnormally.

Figure 3102 shows the layout of the CB02VFB card.
ON
S091
ON
S071
ON
S031
ON
S151
ON
S131
ON
S011
ON
S111
ON
S051

Figure 3102 Layout of the CB02VFB card
Table 396 describes the settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card.
Table 396 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card
DIP switch Controlled port
S011-1 1
S011-2 2
S031-1 3
S031-2 4
S051-1 5
S051-2 6

3-149
DIP switch Controlled port
S071-1 7
S071-2 8
S091-1 9
S091-2 10
S111-1 11
S111-2 12
S131-1 13
S131-2 14
S151-1 15
S151-2 16
When these DIP switches are set to ON, 600-ohm impedance will be selected; when
they are set to OFF, the 1650-ohm impedance will be selected. Their factory settings
are ON.

The CB02VFB provides 16 common voice frequency ports.
The first eight ports are distributed on the 1st8th rows of pins on the upper
HEADER. See Figure 3103.
The last eight ports are distributed on the 25th32nd rows of pins on the lower
HEADER. See Figure 3104.

3-150
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Figure 3103 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CB02VFB

3-151
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

Figure 3104 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CB02VFB
3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port CardCB03VFB
3.40.1 Overview
The CB03VFB card is the railway collinear voice frequency port card. The CB03VFB
card is slot compatible with other common line cards, and uses the same cable as the
32-port line card.
The CB03VFB card provides the terminal ports for the railway collinear dispatch system
and the common 2/4-wire voice frequency ports. It also realizes the 2/4-wire setting
function and the gain adjusting function through the software. However, it provides no
feeding, ringing or on-hook detection.
3.40.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card, as described in
Table 397.
Table 397 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card

3-152
Fast blinking or OFF The card works abnormally.

3.40.3 DIP Switches
Figure 3105 shows the layout of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card.
ON
SW0
ON
SW1

Figure 3105 Layout of the CB03VFB card
Table 398 describes the settings of DIP switch of the CB03VFB card.
Table 398 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card
DIP
switch
Function ON OFF (factory setting)
SW0
For
backplane
setting
Corresponding to the
backplanes of HFB, HGB
and HIB. When it is set to
ON, the upper eight ports
support the switchover
between new and old
systems.
OFF, the upper from five to
eight ports dont support the
switchover between new and
old systems.

3-153
DIP
switch
Function ON OFF (factory setting)
SW1
For
backplane
setting
ON, the lower eight ports
support the switchover
between new and old
systems.
OFF, the lower from five to
eight ports dont support the
switchover between new and
old systems.

Note:
CB03VFB can only reside in the PV8 or RSP frame, instead of the UA5000 frame.

The CB03VFB card provides 16 channels of subscriber signals, where,
The first eight channels of signals are distributed to pin rows 18 of the upper
HEADER. They are dedicated in the railway collinear telephone system, and
cannot be connected to ordinary voice frequency Modem.
The last eight channels of signals are distributed to pin rows 2532 of the lower
HEADER. They are signals of ordinary voice frequency services.
See Figure 3103 and Figure 3107 for details.

3-154
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
T8-R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 3106 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-155
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS4-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
T3-R
R4-R
T7-R
R8-R
T4-R
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 3107 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line CardCB01VMS
3.41.1 Overview
The CB01VMS card is the message LED analog line card that provides 16 analog
service ports. It has the following functions:
Provides the feed, overvoltage/overcurrent, ringing, monitoring, and test functions.
Provides 140 VDC to light the message LED on the connected terminal.
Sends Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) control signals to the terminal without ringing,
so that the terminal can play the message.

Note:
The last two functions require the support of the terminal.

3-156
3.41.2 Front Panel
There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card, as described in
Table 399.
Table 399 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card
0.5s ON and .05s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on.
RUN

The CB01VMS card provides 16 channels of subscriber signals, where,
The first eight channels of signals are connected with the 1st8th pin rows on the
upper HEADER.
The last eight channels of signals are connected with the 25th32nd pin rows on
the lower HEADER.
See Figure 3108 and Figure 3109 for details.

3-157
POTS0+
POTS1+
POTS2+
POTS3+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS7+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS3-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-

Figure 3108 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (upper
HEADER)

3-158
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS8-
POTS9-
POTS10-
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14-
POTS15-

Figure 3109 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (lower
HEADER)
3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring CardH303ESC
3.42.1 Overview
The H303ESC card is the environment and power supply monitoring card. It can control
the fans and monitors the following items.
Temperature
Humidity (external sensor shall be connected)
Access control
Infrared intrusion (external sensor shall be connected)
Smoke (external sensor shall be connected)
The H303ESC card communicates with the host through serial port.
The H303ESC card can connect with the following parts.
Six external analog sensors
Sixteen external digital sensors

3-159
Intelligent power supply equipment through serial ports
3.42.2 Front Panel
Figure 3110 shows the front panel of the H303ESC card.
Running status lED
RUN OFF ON
Beeper switch

Figure 3110 Front panel of the H303ESC card
Table 3100 describes the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card.
Table 3100 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card
RUN
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works abnormally.

Table 3101 describes the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card.
Table 3101 Description of the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card
ON Turn on the audio alarm.
Beeper
switch
OFF Turn off the audio alarm.

Figure 3111 shows the layout of the H303ESC card.

3-160
H303ESC
S11
D1
S5
ON
OFF S6
1
ON OFF
S7
1
2
3
4
J2 J5
S
1
S
2
S
1
0
S
3
S
8
1

2

3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 3111 Layout of the H303ESC
Table 3102 describes the settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card.
Table 3102 Settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card
Jumper Setting Default setting
S1
Bits 1-2 connected: serial port SIO1 is RS-232.
Bits 2-3
connected
S2
Bits 2-3
connected
S11
Bits 1-2 connected: running LED on the card is valid.
Bits 2-3 connected: running LED on the card is
invalid.
Bits 1-2
connected
S3, S8,
S10
When bits 1 and 2 of S3, S8 and S10 are connected:
serial port SIO3 is RS-232.
When bits 2 and 3 of S3 are connected, and bits 1
and 2 of S8 and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3
is RS-422.
When bits 2 and 3 of S8 and S10 are connected, bits
of S3 are connected in any way: serial port SIO3 is
RS-485.
All bits 1-2
connected

Table 3103 and Table 3104 describe the settings of DIP switches of the H303ESC
card.

3-161
Table 3103 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC card
DIP switch Setting
Default
setting
When bits 16 are ON: the external analog sensor is
the current-type sensor.
When bits 16 are OFF: the external analog sensor is
the voltage-type sensor.
S6
Bits 78 are reserved.
ON

Table 3104 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC card
DIP switch ON OFF
Factory
setting
S7-1 Used in the access network Used in the exchange ON
S7-2
Reporting through one serial
port
Reporting through two
serial ports
ON
S7-3 No meaning, reserved. ON
S7-4
The reporting baud rate of
the serial port is 19200 bit/s.
the serial port is 9600
bit/s.
OFF

3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring CardH304ESC
3.43.1 Overview
The H304ESC card is the environment and power supply monitoring card. It can control
the fans according to the cabinet temperature and monitors the following items.
Temperature
Humidity (external sensor should be connected)
Access control
Infrared intrusion (external sensor should be connected)
Smoke (external sensor should be connected)
48 V power supply
Through serial ports, the H304ESC card connects communicates with the host.
The H304ESC card can connect with the following parts.
Three external analog sensors
Twelve external digital sensors
Intelligent power supply equipment and environment monitor equipment through
serial ports

3-162
3.43.2 Front Panel
Figure 3112 shows the front panel of the H304ESC card.
Running status LED
RUN OFF ON
Beeper switch Reset button

Figure 3112 Front panel of the H304ESC card
Table 3105 describes the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card.
Table 3105 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card
RUN
0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works abnormally.

Table 3106 describes the switch and the button on the front panel of the H304ESC
card.
Table 3106 Description of the switch and the button on the front panel of the
H304ESC card
ON Turn on the audio alarm.
Beeper
switch
OFF Turn off the audio alarm.

Figure 3113 shows the layout of the H304ESC card.

3-163
12 3
S4
S5
S6
S8
S7
ON OFF S2
1
2
3
4
H304ESC
D6
S9
S1
ON OFF S3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Figure 3113 Layout of the H304ESC card
Table 3107 describes the settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card.
Table 3107 Settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card
DIP switch ON OFF
Factory
setting
S3-1
Used in the access
network.
Used in the exchange. ON
S3-2
Reporting through one
serial port.
Reporting through two
serial ports.
OFF
S3-3 No meaning, reserved NA
S3-4
The reporting baud
rate of the serial port is
19200 bit/s.
the serial port is 9600
bit/s.
OFF
S3-5S3-8 No meaning, reserved NA
S2-1
JTA1 connects with a
current-type sensor.
voltage-type sensor.
OFF
S2-2
OFF
S2-3
OFF
S2-4 No meaning, reserved NA

Table 3108 describes the settings of jumpers of the H304ESC card.

3-164
Table 3108 Settings of jumpers on the H304ESC card
Communication
mode
Silk screen
RS232 RS422 RS485 Remarks
AV5/PV8 Default Not supported
Not
supported
Active reporting
serial port
SIO1 S4 1-2 connected S4 2-3 connected
Not
supported
Power supply
monitoring
serial port
SIO2 S5 1-2 connected S5 2-3 connected
Not
supported
Standby
reporting serial
port
SIO3
S6 1-2 connected
S7 2-3 connected
S8 1-2 connected
S6 1-2 connected
S7 2-3 connected
S8 2-3 connected
Not
supported
Transparent
transmission

Note:
The factory settings of H304ESC vary with the cabinet.

3.44 Fan Control CardH601FCB
3.44.1 Overview
The H601FCB card is the fan control card. It controls the fan speed and detects the fan
state.
The H601FCB card can report the fan state to ESC card in Boolean value or report the
alarm status to the host through RS-485 port for adjusting the fan speed.
The H601FCB card can adjust the fan to rotate within 50%-100% of its rated speed to
reduce the fan noise, reduce the incoming dust to the frame, and prolong the service
life.
The H601HCB is hot-swappable.
3.44.2 Front Panel
Figure 3114 shows the front panel of the H601FCB card.

3-165
Fan running status LED
FAN STATUS

Figure 3114 Front panel of the H601FCB card
Table 3109 describes the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card.
Table 3109 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The fan works normally.
FAN STATUS
repeatedly
The fan works abnormally.

3.44.3 DIP Switches
Figure 3115 shows the layout of DIP switches of the CC08TSS card.
SW101
O
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
H601FCB

Figure 3115 Layout of the H601FCB card
The DIP switches SW101-1-SW101-4 are used to set the secondary node address,
which ranges from 00H to 0FH. Since this card requires no secondary node address,
you can set these DIP switches to any values.
The DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 are used to set the fan number. Table 3110
lists the settings.
Table 3110 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6
SW101-5 SW101-6 Fan number
ON ON 6
ON OFF 2
OFF ON 4
OFF OFF 3

3-166
The DIP switches SW101-7 and SW101-8 are used to set the fan speed adjustment
mode. Table 3111 lists the settings.
Table 3111 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8
SW101-7 SW101-8 Fan speed adjusted by
ON ON Temperature at air inlet
ON OFF Temperature at air outlet
OFF ON Reserved
OFF OFF
Temperature at air inlet and stop
running

Table 3112 lists the factory settings of SW101-5 to SW101-8. Change the factory
settings with caution.
Table 3112 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8
SW101-5 SW101-6 SW101-7 SW101-8
Factory
setting
OFF OFF OFF OFF

3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring CardH611PWMA
3.45.1 Overview
The H611PWMA card is the remote power supply monitoring and management card.
The H611PWMA card has the following features:
It provides the centralized monitoring and management function for the remote
power supply at the central office.
One H611PWMA card can monitor 28 remote power supply modules.
One control card can monitor multiple remote power supply modules.
Working principle of the H611PWMA card is as follows:
1) It connects all the RPS modules through the 14 RJ-45 ports of the front panel in
the RS-485 mode. The cable of one RJ-45 port can connect with two modules.
2) It collects and converts relevant information of the remote power supply module,
for example, alarm information. And then, it reports the information to the host
through an RS-485 serial port in a centralized manner.
3.45.2 Front Panel
Figure 3116 shows the front panel of the H611PWMA card.

3-167
POWER
DOWNLINK-B DOWNLINK-A
DIP ON
P
o
w
e
r

p
o
r
t
D
o
w
n
s
t
r
e
a
m

s
e
r
i
a
l
p
o
r
t
s

o
f

t
h
e

P
W
M
A
UPLINK DEBUG
ADDRESS ALM RUN
U
p
s
t
r
e
a
m

s
e
r
i
a
l
p
o
r
t
s

o
f

t
h
e

P
W
M
A
D
e
b
u
g

s
e
r
i
a
l

p
o
r
t
R
e
s
e
t

b
u
t
t
o
n
S
l
a
v
e

n
o
d
e

a
d
d
r
e
s
s
o
f

t
h
e

P
W
M
A
A
l
a
r
m

L
E
D
R
u
n
n
i
n
g

s
t
a
t
u
s

L
E
D

Figure 3116 Front panel of the H611PWMA card
Table 3113 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card.
Table 3113 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card
The card has registered and is
running.
repeatedly
The card is powered on but has not
registered.
RUN
The RUN LED and the ALM LED
blink at the same time
The card is being loaded.
Alarm state, indicating the card is
faulty.
OFF The card is normal. ALM
ON
Communication with the host is
interrupted.

Table 3114 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H611PWMA
card.

3-168
H611PWMA card
ADDRESS
NO-1, OFF-0
Bit 15: DIP switch of the bus address (bit 1 is the lower bit, bit 5
is the upper bit, and the address range is 031).
Bit 7: the downlink baud rate.
0: 4,800
1: 9,600
Bit 8: the uplink baud rate.
0: 9,600
1: 1,9200
DEGUB
RS-232 for local maintenance. The communication baud rate is
4,800 bit/s.
UPLINK
RS-485. There are two RJ-45 ports in total, used to interconnect
with the other two PWMA cards respectively. And then the uplink
serial port of one PWMA card connects to the main control card.
The communication baud rate is: 9,600 bit/s or 19,200 bit/s.
DOWNLINK-A,
and
DOWNLINK-B
RS-485. There are 14 RJ-45 port in total, used to interconnect with
up to 28 RPS modules. One RJ-45 port can connect to two RPS
modules.
The communication baud rate is: 4,800 bit/s or 9,600 bit/s.
POWER For details of the pin definition, see the silkscreen on the PCB.

3.46 Secondary Power Supply CardH602PWX0
3.46.1 Overview
The H602PWX0 secondary power supply card is the universal medium-power output
power card. It provides three types of outputs:
+5 VDC
5 VDC
75 VAC, 25 Hz
An H602PWX0 card occupies one slot. It is hot swappable, and works in the hot backup
mode.
Usually, two PWX cards are required in one frame. However, for the mutual-aid
between frames, only one PWX card is needed.
Two H602PWX0 cards in one frame have the functions of load sharing and mutual aid.
The H602PWX0 cards in different frames support the inter-frame power mutual-aid
function.

3-169
The H602PWX0 card has the following features:
It supports the interlocking function when either of 5 V power output fails, as well
as the function of DC output current-limiting protection.
Each power module on the H602PWX0 card has the overtemperature protection
function.
By the intelligent monitoring function, the H602PWX0 card can monitor the
running status of each power module, and report the information to the control
card or ESC card through serial ports in the master-slave node communication
mode.
It can generate audio and visible alarms on site.
3.46.2 Front Panel
Figure 3117 shows the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.
Running status LED
Working LED for the 75 VAC module
-48 V power input switch
Working LED for the +5 V module
Fault alarm LED
Alarm sound switch
VIN
VA0
PWX
FAIL
VB0
VC0
POWER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ALM
(RUN)
Working LED for the -5 V module

Figure 3117 Front panel of the H602PWX0 card
Table 3115 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.

3-170
Table 3115 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card
1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The program runs normally.
VIN(RUN)
Fast blinking The program runs abnormally.
ON
The 75 VAC power module works
normally.
VAO
OFF The 75 VAC power module is faulty.
ON
The +5 V power module works
normally.
VBO
OFF The +5 V power module is faulty.
ON
The 5 V power module works
normally.
VCO
OFF The 5 V power module is faulty.
Blinking The card is faulty.
FAIL
OFF The card works normally.

Table 3116 describes the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.
Table 3116 Description of the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card
ON Enable the 48 V power input.
POWER
OFF Disable the 48 V power input.
ON Enable the alarm sound.
ALM
OFF Disable the alarm sound.

Figure 3118 shows the layout of the H602PWX0 card.

3-171
H602PWX0
F302: output fuse of the ringing current
F301: input fuse of the ringing current
F101: -48 V power input fuse
J
P
1
0
1
J
P
2
0
1

Figure 3118 Layout of the H602PWX0 card
Table 3117 shows the settings of jumpers of the H602PWX0 card.
Table 3117 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX0 card
Jumper Description Meaning Factory setting
JP101
Setting of TRM end
when +5 V is output.
It has been set properly
before delivery.
Connect pins 1-2
JP201
Setting of TRM end
when 5 V is output.
before delivery.
Connect pins 1-2

3.47 Secondary Power Supply CardH602PWX2
3.47.1 Overview
The H602PWX2 power supply card is a universal medium-power output power card. It
provides three types of outputs:
+5 VDC
5 VDC
75 VAC, 25 Hz
An H602PWX2 card occupies one slot. It is hot swappable. The card works in the hot
backup mode.
Usually, two PWX cards are required in one frame. However, for the mutual-aid
between frames, only one secondary power supply card is needed.

3-172
Two PWX cards in one frame have the functions of load sharing and mutual aid. The
PWX cards in different frames support the inter-frame power mutual-aid function.
The H602PWX0 card has the following features:
It supports the interlocking function when either of 5 V power output fails, as well
as the function of DC output current-limiting protection.
Each power module on the H602PWX0 card has the overtemperature protection
function.
The H602PWX0 card can monitor the running of the PWX card.
It can generate audio and visible alarms on site.
3.47.2 Front Panel
Figure 3119 shows the front panel of the H602PWX2 card.
VIN
VA0
PWX
FAIL
VB0
VC0
POWER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ALM
(RUN)
Running status LED
Working LED for the 75 VAC module
-48 V power input switch
Working LED for the +5 V module
Fault alarm LED
Alarm sound switch
Working LED for the -5 V module

Figure 3119 Front panel of the H602PWX2 card
Table 3118 describes the details on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card.

3-173
Table 3118 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card
1s ON and 1s OFF
repeatedly
The program runs normally.
VIN(RUN)
Fast blinking The program runs abnormally.
ON The 75 VAC power module works normally.
VAO
OFF The 75 VAC power module is faulty.
ON The +5V power module works normally.
VBO
OFF The +5 V power module is faulty.
ON The 5 V power module works normally.
VCO
OFF The 5 V power module is faulty.
Blinking The card is faulty.
FAIL
OFF The card works normally.
ON Enable the 48 V power input.
POWER
OFF Disable the 48 V power input.
ON Enable the alarm sound.
ALM
OFF Disable the alarm sound.

3.47.3 Jumpers
Figure 3120 shows the layout of the H602PWX2 card.

3-174
F301
F101
3
JP201
1 2
JP101
1
2
3
J
P
5
3
1
2
F302
-48 V power input fuse
Input fuse of the ringing current
Output fuse of the ringing current

Figure 3120 Layout of the H602PWX2 card
Table 3119 shows the settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card.

3-175
Table 3119 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card
Jumper Description Meaning Factory setting
JP101
Setting of TRM end
when +5 V is output.
before delivery.
Connect pins
2-3
JP201
Setting of TRM end
when 5 V is output.
before delivery.
Connect pins
1-2
JP5
Selection of OC gate
alarm port level
Pins 1-2 are connected:
low impedance
Pins 2-3 are connected:
high impedance
Connect pins
2-3

3.48 Subscriber Test CardH601TSSB/H601TSSC
3.48.1 Overview
The H601TSSB/H601TSSC card is the subscriber test card. It implements the following
functions:
Analog subscriber circuit and loop line test
Analog telephone set test
Activation/Deactivation/Feed of ISDN 2B+D subscriber port test
Activation capability of ISDN digital terminal test
Digital telephone set and standard NT1 port
Manual test port (for subscriber cable test)
Detecting alarms and sending alarm messages: detecting the secondary power
supply card alarms and report them to the control card
Communicating with the APM/IPM card through the serial port, controlled by the
broadband and narrowband control card
Printing the communication information with the host through the debug serial port
Emulation test at the xDSL CO end
Leading out circuit and loop test bus from the front panel for the external tester

Note:
The emulation test at the xDSL CO end is not performed at the H601TSSB/H601TSSC
card, but at one channel of the xDSL port card, which cooperates with the control card.
The H601TSSB card connects the internal bus with the external bus only.


3-176
3.48.2 Front Panel
Figure 3121 shows the front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC
card (right).
Running status LED
Manual semi-auto test bus
ISDN test port, reserved for
alarm input of the PWX card
Analog subscriber circuit and loop
line test port, subscriber line test
port, or telephone set test port
TSSB
RUN
M
T
I
I
S
D
N
L
T
I
TSSC
RUN
M
T
I
I
S
D
N
L
T
I

Figure 3121 Front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC card (right)
Table 3120 describes the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.
Table 3120 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC
card
RUN
0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is abnormal.

Table 3121 describes the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.

3-177
Table 3121 Description of the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC
card
MTI
It provides the manual semi-auto test bus, and the corresponding RJ
socket is J452.
ISDN It is reserved for the system, and the corresponding RJ socket is J453.
LTI
It works as either the analog subscriber circuit and loop line test port,
subscriber line test port, or the telephone set test port, and the
corresponding RJ socket is J451.

Figure 3122 shows the pin assignment of the MTI, ISDN, and LT1 ports on the front
panel of the H601TSSB card.
J451
RJ45
OSLT1
OSLR1
TELR
LSLR1
LSLT1
TELT
MANL
MANR
J453
RJ45
TNT1T 2
TNT1R 1
GND 3
TDSLR 4
TDSLT 5
GND 6
APOWI+ 7
FGND 8
J452
RJ45
MTXD232O 2
MRXD232I 1
DTXD232O 3
GND 4
GND 5
DRXD232I 6
HAUTOR 7
HAUTOL 8
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8

Figure 3122 Pin assignment of three ports on the front panel of the
H601TSSB/H601TSSC card
Table 3122 describes the pins of the three ports.
Table 3122 Description of pins of three ports on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card
J451 Signal Description
1 OSLR1 Loop line B
2 OSLT1 Loop line A
3 TELR Telephone test B
4 ISLR1 Circuit B
5 ISLT1 Circuit A
6 TELT Telephone test A
7 MANL Signal A of 112 device test port
8 MANR Signal B of 112 device test port


3-178
1 MRXD232I Reserved
2 MTXD232O Reserved
3 DTXD232O Tx for debug and loading serial port
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 DRXD232I Rx for debug and loading serial port
7 HAUTOR Reserved
8 HAUTOR Reserved

1 TNT1R Signal B of digital telephone set port
2 TNT1T Signal A of digital telephone set port
3 GND Ground
4 TDSLR Signal B of standard NT1 port
5 TDSLT Signal A of standard NT1 port
6 GND Ground
7 APOWI+ Reserved
8 FGND Reserved

H601TSSB/H601TSSC card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of
the backplane.

3-179
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
ISLT1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8+
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13+
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
OSLT1
PGND
RINGI
-48VIN
-48VIN
PGND
BGND
BGND
PGND
+5VIN
+5VIN
GND
GND
ID0
ID1
BTXO
BRXI
GND
APOWI+
ISLR1
OSLR1
PGND
RINGI
-48VIN
-48VIN
BGND
BGND
PGND
+5VIN
+5VIN
GND
GND
ID2
ID3
BTXO
BRXI
GND
ID4

Figure 3123 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card

3-180
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12+
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
+5VIN
+5VIN
GND
GND
GND
BGND
BGND
TX422O+
RX422I+
P3TXD
P3RXD
FGND
+5VIN
GND
GND
-48VIN
-48VIN
RINGI
PGND
PGND
ISLT1
OSLT1
GND
+5VIN
+5VIN
+5VIN
IDBACI
BGND
BGND
TX422O-
RX422I-
-48VIN
-48VIN
RINGI
PGND
PGND
ISLR1
OSRT1

Figure 3124 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card
Table 3123 describes the pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.
Table 3123 Description of pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card
Signal line Meaning
ISLR1, ISLT1 The first circuit testing channel
OSLR1, OSLT1 The first loop line testing channel
RINGI PWX ringing signal (input)
48VIN 48 V power supply
BGND 48 V power supply ground
PGND Test ground
+5VIN +5 V power supply
GND +5 V power supply ground
APOWI+ Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)
BTXO Narrowband serial port Tx channel

3-181
Signal line Meaning
BRXI Narrowband serial port Rx channel
P3RXD Broadband serial port Rx
P3TXD Broadband serial port Tx

3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion CardH601E1TB
3.49.1 Overview
The H601E1TB card is the rear access E1 conversion card.
The H601E1TB card resides in the HABA frame and the HABB frame. The H601E1TB
card transfers E1 signals of the H601DEHA, H601EDTB, and H601TDTA cards. The
two D-type connectors (44-pin) on the front panel can transfer eight channels of E1
signals.
3.49.2 Front Panel
The H601E1TB card provides two D-type connectors (44-pin) on the front panel: J3 and
J4. J3 transfers the 1st8th E1 signals, and J4 transfers the 9th16th E1 signals.
Figure 3125 defines the pins of the connector. Where,
RX: receiving of E1 signals
TX: transmitting of E1 signals
RING: shielded layer of the E1 cable
TIP: core of the E1 cable

3-182
RXRING1
TXTIP1
TXRING1
TXTIP2
TXRING2
TXTIP3
TXRING3
TXTIP4
TXRING4
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
TXTIP5
TXTIP6
TXTIP7
RXTIP1
RXTIP2
RXTIP3
RXTIP4
RXTIP5
RXTIP6
RXTIP7
RXTIP8
TXRING5
TXRING6
TXRING7
RXRING2
RXRING3
RXRING4
RXRING5
RXRING6
RXRING7
RXRING8
TXRING8
TXTIP8
RXRING9
TXTIP9
TXRING9
TXTIP10
TXRING10
TXTIP11
TXRING11
TXTIP12
TXRING12
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
TXTIP13
TXTIP14
TXTIP15
RXTIP9
RXTIP10
RXTIP11
RXTIP12
RXTIP13
RXTIP14
RXTIP15
RXTIP16
TXRING13
TXRING14
TXRING15
RXRING10
RXRING11
RXRING12
RXRING13
RXRING14
RXRING15
RXRING16
TXRING16
TXTIP16
J3
J4

Figure 3125 Definition of J3 and J4 on the front panel of the card
The H601E1TB card and the backplane are connected by the DIN connectors J1 and
J2. Figure 3123 and Figure 3127 define the pins of J1 and J2.

3-183
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS14+
POTS15+
RXRING1
TXRING1
RXRING2
TXRING2
RXRING9
RXTIP9
TXRING9
TXTIP9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RXRING3
TXRING3
RXRING4
TXRING4
RXTIP1
TXTIP1
RXTIP2
TXTIP2
RXTIP3
TXTIP3
RXTIP4
TXTIP4
RXRING10
RXTIP10
TXRING10
TXTIP10
RXRING11
RXTIP11
TXRING11
TXTIP11
RXRING12
RXTIP12
TXRING12
TXTIP12

Figure 3126 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J1)
RXRING5
TXRING5
RXRING6
TXRING6
RXRING13
RXTIP13
TXRING13
TXTIP13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
RXRING7
TXRING7
RXRING8
TXRING8
RXTIP5
TXTIP5
RXTIP6
TXTIP6
RXTIP7
TXTIP7
RXTIP8
TXTIP8
RXRING14
RXTIP14
TXRING14
TXTIP14
RXRING15
RXTIP15
TXRING15
TXTIP15
RXRING16
RXTIP16
TXRING16
TXTIP16

Figure 3127 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J2)

3-184
3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion CardH601E1TF
3.50.1 Overview
The H601E1TF card is the front access E1 conversion card.
The H601E1TF card resides in the HABD frame. The only one D-type connector
(68-pin) on the front panel transfers the E1 signals of the narrowband control card to the
cable connecting area of the frame. Each H601E1TF card can transfer 16 channels of
E1 signals.
3.50.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601E1TF card. Figure 3128
shows the front panel of the card.
DB-68 socket
E1TF

Figure 3128 Front panel of the H601E1TF card
Table 3124 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card.
Table 3124 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 RXA4-T 35 RXA0-T
2 RXA4-R 36 RXA0-R
3 TXA4-T 37 TXA0-T
4 TXA4-R 38 TXA0-R
5 RXA5-T 39 RXA1-T
6 RXA5-R 40 RXA1-R
7 TXA5-T 41 TXA1-T
8 TXA5-R 42 TXA1-R
9 RXA6-T 43 RXA2-T
10 RXA6-R 44 RXA2-R

3-185
11 TXA6-T 45 TXA2-T
12 TXA6-R 46 TXA2-R
13 RXA7-T 47 RXA3-T
14 RXA7-R 48 RXA3-R
15 TXA7-T 49 TXA3-T
16 TXA7-R 50 TXA3-R
19 RXB0-T 53 RXB4-T
20 RXB0-R 54 RXB4-R
21 TXB0-T 55 TXB4-T
22 TXB0-R 56 TXB4-R
23 RXB1-T 57 RXB5-T
24 RXB1-R 58 RXB5-R
25 TXB1-T 59 TXB5-T
26 TXB1-R 60 TXB5-R
27 RXB2-T 61 RXB6-T
28 RXB2-R 62 RXB6-R
29 TXB2-T 63 TXB6-T
30 TXB2-R 64 TXB6-R
31 RXB3-T 65 RXB7-T
32 RXB3-R 66 RXB7-R
33 TXB3-T 67 TXB7-T
34 TXB3-R 68 TXB7-R

The characters on the pins are shown as follows:
R or T at the beginning indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively.
A or B indicates the narrowband control cards in slot 4 or slot 5 respectively.
The numbers are the E1 serial numbers.
The last R or T indicates "ring" or "tip" respectively.
3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion CardH601EFTB
3.51.1 Overview
The H601EFTB card is the rear access FE conversion card.

3-186
The card converts the H601EAUA card. The card provides one DB68 connector with
eight FE ports.
The H601EFTB card resides in the HABA frame and the HABB frame. The only one
D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers eight channels of FE signals.
3.51.2 Front Panel
The H601EFTB card provides only a D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel.
Figure 3129defines the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card. Where,
RX: receiving of FE signals
TX: transmitting of FE signals
+/-: +/- of the FE signal
FERX8-
FERX8+
FERX0-
FERX0+
FETX0-
FETX0+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
FERX1-
FERX1+
FETX1-
FETX1+
FERX2-
FERX2+
FETX2-
FETX2+
FERX3-
FERX3+
FETX3-
FETX3+
FERX4-
FERX4+
FETX4-
FETX4+
FERX5-
FERX5+
FETX5-
FETX5+
FERX6-
FERX6+
FETX6-
FETX6+
FERX7-
FERX7+
FETX7-
FETX7+
FETX8-
FETX8+
FERX9-
FERX9+
FETX9-
FETX9+
FERX10-
FERX10+
FETX10-
FETX10+
FERX11-
FERX11-
FETX11+
FETX11+
FERX4-
FERX4+
FETX4-
FETX4+
FERX5-
FERX5+
FETX5-
FETX5+
FERX6-
FERX6+
FETX6-
FETX6+
FERX7-
FERX7+
FETX7-
FETX7+

Figure 3129 Definition of the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card

3-187
The backplane provides DIN connectors J1 and J2. Figure 3123 and Figure 3131
show the pin assignment between the H601E1TB and the backplane. Where,
RX: receiving of FE signals
TX: transmitting of FE signals
+/-: +/- of the FE signal
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
FERX0-
FETX0-
FERX1-
FETX1-
FERX8+
FERX8-
FETX8+
FETX8-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
FERX2-
FETX2-
FERX3-
FETX3-
FERX0+
FETX0+
FERX1+
FETX1+
FERX2+
FETX2+
FERX3+
FETX3+
FERX9+
FERX9-
FETX9+
FETX9-
FERX10+
FERX10-
FETX10+
FETX10-
FERX11+
FERX11-
FETX11+
FETX11-

Figure 3130 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J1)

3-188
POTS2+
POTS4+
POTS5+
POTS6+
POTS0-
POTS1-
POTS2-
POTS4-
POTS5-
POTS6-
POTS7-
POTS8-
POTS9+
POTS9-
POTS10+
POTS10-
POTS11+
POTS11-
POTS12-
POTS13-
POTS14+
POTS14-
POTS15+
POTS15-
FERX4-
FETX4-
FERX5-
FETX5-
FERX12+
FERX12-
FETX12+
FETX12-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
FERX6-
FETX6-
FERX7-
FETX7-
FERX4+
FETX4+
FERX5+
FETX5+
FERX6+
FETX6+
FERX7+
FETX7+
FERX13+
FERX13-
FETX13+
FETX13-
FERX14+
FERX14-
FETX14+
FETX14-
FERX15+
FERX15-
FETX15+
FETX15-

Figure 3131 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J2)
3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion CardH601EFTF
3.52.1 Overview
The H601EFTF card is the front access E1/FE conversion card.
The H601EFTF card resides in the HABD frame and the HABE frame. The only one
D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers 16 channels of E1 signals or
eight channels of FE signals to the cable connecting area of the frame.
3.52.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601EFTF card.
Figure 3132 shows the front panel of the card.

3-189
DB-68 socket
EFTF

Figure 3132 Front panel of the H601EFTF card
Table 3125 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card.
Table 3125 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card
1 RXA4-T/FE_RXA4+ 35 RXA0-T/FE_RXA0+
2 RXA4-R/FE_RXA4- 36 RXA0-R/FE_RXA0-
3 TXA4-T/FE_TXA4+ 37 TXA0-T/FE_TXA0+
4 TXA4-R/FE_TXA4- 38 TXA0-R/FE_TXA0-
19 RXB0-T/FE_RXB0+ 53 RXB4-T/FE_RXB4+
20 RXB0-R/FE_RXB0- 54 RXB4-R/FE_RXB4-
21 TXB0-T/FE_TXB0+ 55 TXB4-T/FE_TXB4+
22 TXB0-R/FE_TXB0- 56 TXB4-R/FE_TXB4-

3-190

When the H601EFTF card works as the E1 conversion card, the characters on the pins
are shown as follows:
R or T at the beginning indicates receiving or transmitting respectively.
A or B indicates the broadband control card in slot 3 or slot 2 respectively.
When the H601EFTF card works as the FE conversion card, the characters on the pins
are shown as follows:
R or T at the beginning indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively.
A or B indicates the broadband control card in slot 2 or slot 3 respectively.
The numbers are the E1 port serial numbers.
3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access
Master Frame to Extended FrameH601HLAF
3.53.1 Overview
The H601HLAF card is the high speed link conversion card from front access master
frame to extended frame.
The H601HLAF card resides in the HABD and the HABE frame. The H601HLAF card
connects to the HABF frame through the D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel.

3-191
3.53.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLAF card.
DB-68 socket
HLAF

Figure 3133 Front panel of the H601HLAF card
3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access
Extended FrameH601HLEF
3.54.1 Overview
The H601HLEF card is the high speed link conversion card of front access extended
frame.
The H601HLEF card resides in the HABF frame. The H601HLEF card connects to the
HABD frame or the HABE frame through the D-type connector (68-pin) on the front
panel.
3.54.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLEF card. Figure 3134
DB-68 socket
HLEF

Figure 3134 Front panel of the H601HLEF card

3-192
3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave
FrameH601HLSF
3.55.1 Overview
The H601HLSF card is the high speed link conversion card of front access slave frame.
The H601HLSF card resides in the HABD frame and the HABE frame. The H601HLSF
card connects to the HABD frame and the HABE frame through the D-type connector
(68-pin) on the front panel.
3.55.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLSF card.
DB-68 socket
HLSF

Figure 3135 Front panel of the H601HLSF card
3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master
FrameH601HWCB
3.56.1 Overview
The H601HWCB card is rear access HW conversion card of master frame.
The H601HWCB card resides in the HABA frame. The H601HWCB card provides the
clock input port, E1 output port, and HW port for connecting with the HABB frame.
3.56.2 Front Panel
Figure 3136 shows the front panel of the H601HWCB card.

3-193
BITS0
BITS1
E1port A
E1port B
HW subtending port

Figure 3136 Front panel of the H601HWCB card
Table 3126 describes the front panel of the H601HWCB card.
Table 3126 Description of the front panel of the H601HWCB card
Name Connector Signal
BITS 01 SMB
They input two channels of 2 MHz clock signals,
which back up each other.
E1 port AB DB-44
They output E1 signals from the
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4/PVM.
HW
subtending
port
DB-36
It subtends the following signals of the slave
frame:
HW signals
Narrowband clock frame header signals
Serial port signals
Broadband clock signals
Extended frame in-position signals

3-194
3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master
FrameH601HWCF
3.57.1 Overview
The H601HWCF card is the HW conversion card of the front access master frame.
The H601HWCF card resides in the HABD frame. The H601HWCF card provides one
test and alarm port, one clock input port, and three HW ports for connecting with the
HABE frame and HABF frame.
3.57.2 Front Panel
Figure 3137 shows the front panel of the H601HWCF card.
RJ-45 socket
DB-28 socket
DB-28 socket
HWCF
C
L
K

I
N
S
T
A
C
K

O
U
T
H
W
O
U
T
1
H
W
O
U
T
0
H
W
O
U
T
2

Figure 3137 Front panel of the H601HWCF card
Table 3127 describes the connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card.
Table 3127 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card
CLK IN RJ-45
It inputs the following signals:
Two channels of 2 MHz clock signals
One channel of differential 8 kHz clock
synchronization signal
One channel of differential clock selection
signal
STACK
OUT
DB-28
It outputs the following signals:
Circuit and loop line test signals
Fan frame alarm signals
ESC serial port signals
Broadband and narrowband RS-485 serial port
signals
Power supply alarm signals
RS-485 serial port signals of the fan

3-195
HWOUT0 DB-28
It outputs the following signals to the extended
frame of the master frame:
HW signals
Serial port signals
HWOUT1 DB-28
It outputs the following signals to the slave frame:
HW signals
Serial port signals
HWOUT2 DB-28
It outputs the following signals to the extended
frame of the slave frame:
HW signals
Serial port signals
Slave frame in-position signals

3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave
FrameH601HWTB
3.58.1 Overview
The H601HWTB card is HW conversion card of the rear access slave frame.
The H601HWTB card resides in the HABB frame. The H601HWTB card provides
subtending ports for connecting with the HABA frame.
3.58.2 Front Panel
There is only a HW subtending port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card.
Table 3128 describes the front panel of the H601HWTB card.

3-196
Table 3128 Description of the port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card
Name Port Signal
HW
subtending
port
DB-36
It subtends the following signals of the
master frame:
HW signals
Narrowband clock frame header
signals
Serial port signals

3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended
FrameH601HWTF
3.59.1 Overview
The H601HWTF card is the HW conversion card of the front access extended frame
The H601HWTF card resides in the HABE frame and the HABF frame. The
H601HWTF card provides two test and alarm ports, one clock output port, and one HW
signal subtending port for connecting with the HABD frame.
3.59.2 Front Panel
Figure 3138 shows the front panel of the H601HWTF card.
RJ-45 socket
DB-28 socket
DB-28 socket
HWTF
C
L
K

O
U
T
S
T
A
C
K

O
U
T
H
W
I
N
S
T
A
C
K

I
N

Figure 3138 Front panel of the H601HWTF card
Table 3129 describes the connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card.

3-197
Table 3129 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card
CLK OUT RJ-45
Different 8k clock signals
Differential clock selection signals
STACK OUT DB-28
Power alarm signals
STACK IN DB-28
Power alarm signals
HWIN DB-28
Slave/extended frame HW signals
Serial port signals
In-position signals of the slave/extended frame

3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion CardH601RATB
3.60.1 Overview
The H601RATB card is the 32-port rear-access relay conversion card.
The H601RATB card realizes conversion among the following cables:
frame subscriber cable
line card lead-in cable
circuit and loop test line of the frame
In this way, it realizes the circuit and loop line test function and the port backup function
for line cards.
The H601RATB card is designed for the 32-port line card. However, it is also suitable
for the 16-port line card. Besides the PCB, the 32-port relay card can also be used on
the 16-port service card.
The H601RATB card has the following features:
It provides rear-access line for the 32-port service card.
It features the circuit and loop line test function. You can carry out the circuit test
and the loop line test at the same time without affecting each other.
It features the port backup function.

3-198
It features the circuit and loop line test function by using two buses.
During the circuit and loop line test for the broadband service, the narrowband
service can be disconnected or not.
3.60.2 Front Panel
The front panel of the H601RATB card uses the DIN connector for front access.
Figure 3139 shows the pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
LINEA0
LINEA1
LINEA2
LINEA3
LINEA4
LINEA5
LINEA6
LINEA7
LINEB24
LINEB25
LINEB26
LINEB27
LINEB28
LINEB29
LINEB30
LINEB31
LINEA24
LINEA25
LINEA26
LINEA27
LINEA28
LINEA29
LINEA30
LINEA31
LINEA8
LINEB8
LINEA9
LINEB9
LINEA10
LINEB10
LINEA11
LINEB11
LINEA12
LINEB12
LINEA13
LINEB13
LINEA14
LINEB14
LINEA15
LINEB15
LINEA16
LINEB16
LINEA17
LINEB17
LINEA18
LINEB18
LINEA19
LINEB19
LINEA20
LINEB20
LINEA21
LINEB21
LINEA22
LINEB22
LINEA23
LINEB23
LINEB0
LINEB1
LINEB2
LINEB3
LINEB4
LINEB5
LINEB6
LINEB7

Figure 3139 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card
The H601RATB card connects with the backplane through J1 and J2. Figure 3140 and
Figure 3141 define J1 and J2 between the H601RATB card and the backplane.

3-199
ASL_B6
ASL_B0
ASL_B1
ASL_B2
ASL_B3
ASL_B4
ASL_B5
ASL_B7
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
B_ITB1
B_OTB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
ASL_A8
ASL_B8
ASL_A9
ASL_B9
ASL_A10
ASL_B10
ASL_A11
ASL_B11
ASL_A12
ASL_B12
ASL_A13
ASL_B13
ASL_A14
ASL_B14
ASL_A15
ASL_B15
VCC
GND
ASL_A0
ASL_A1
ASL_A3
ASL_A4
ASL_A5
ASL_A6
ASL_A7
B_ITA1
B_OTA1
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
GND
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 3140 Pin assignment of connector J1

3-200
ASL_B30
ASL_B24
ASL_B25
ASL_B26
ASL_B27
ASL_B28
ASL_B29
ASL_B31
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
B_ITB2
B_OTB2
GND
GND
ASL_A16
ASL_B16
ASL_A17
ASL_B17
ASL_A18
ASL_B18
ASL_A19
ASL_B19
ASL_A20
ASL_B20
ASL_A21
ASL_B21
ASL_A22
ASL_B22
ASL_A23
ASL_B23
GND
ASL_A24
ASL_A25
ASL_A26
ASL_A27
ASL_A28
ASL_A29
ASL_A30
ASL_A31
B_ITA2
B_OTA2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Figure 3141 Pin assignment of connector J2
Table 3130 lists pins on the H601RATB card.
Table 3130 Pins on the H601RATB card
Signal Number Description
ASL_A0A31 32 Loop line A
ASL_B0B31 32 Loop line B
OTA/OTB 4 Loop line test bus
ITA/ITB 2 Circuit test bus
VCC 3 5 V power supply for the relay card
GND 2 Ground

3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion
CardH601RATF
3.61.1 Overview
The H601RATF card is the 32-port front access relay conversion card.

3-201
The H601RATF card realizes conversion among the following cables:
frame subscriber cable
line card lead-in cable
circuit and loop test line of the frame
In this way, it realizes the circuit and loop line test function and the port backup function
for line cards.
The H601RATF card is designed for the 32-port line card. However, it is also suitable
for the 16-port line card. Besides the PCB, the 32-port relay card can also be used on
the 16-port service card.
The H601RATF card has the following features:
It provides front-access line for the 32-port service card.
It features the circuit and loop line test function. You can carry out the circuit test
and the loop line test at the same time without affecting each other.
It features the port backup function.
It features the circuit and loop line test function using two buses.
During the circuit and loop line test for the broadband service, the narrowband
service can be disconnected or not.
3.61.2 Front Panel
The front panel of the H601RATF card has only a DB68 port, which leads in 32 pairs of
subscriber lines, as shown in Figure 3142.

3-202
LINE_B8
LINE_A8
LINE_B9
LINE_A9
LINE_B10
LINE_A10
LINE_B11
LINE_A11
LINE_B0
LINE_A0
LINE_B1
LINE_A1
LINE_B2
LINE_A2
LINE_B3
LINE_A3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
LINE_B4
LINE_A4
LINE_B5
LINE_A5
LINE_B6
LINE_A6
LINE_B7
LINE_A7
LINEB16
LINE_A16
LINE_B17
LINE_A17
LINE_B18
LINE_A18
LINE_B19
LINE_A19
LINE_B20
LINE_A20
LINE_B21
LINE_A21
LINE_B22
LINE_A22
LINE_B23
LINE_A23
LINE_B12
LINE_A12
LINE_B13
LINE_A13
LINE_B14
LINE_A14
LINE_B15
LINE_A15
LINE_B24
LINE_A24
LINE_B25
LINE_A25
LINE_B26
LINE_A26
LINE_B27
LINE_A27
LINE_B28
LINE_A28
LINE_B29
LINE_A29
LINE_B30
LINE_A30
LINE_B31
LINE_A31

Figure 3142 Ports on the front panel of the H601RATF card
Figure 3143 shows the pin assignment between the H601RATF card and the
backplane.

3-203
101
100
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ASL_B5
ASL_A5
ASL_A6
ASL_B7
ASL_A7
ASL_B13
ASL_A14
ASL_B14
ASL_A15
VCC
ASL_B29
ASL_A29
ASL_A30
ASL_B31
ASL_A31
ASL_B21
ASL_A22
ASL_B22
ASL_A23
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
ASL_A4
ASL_B6
ASL_B12
ASL_A13
B_ITA1
ASL_B15
ASL_A28
ASL_B30
ASL_B20
ASL_A21
B_ITA2
ASL_B23
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
ASL_B4
ASL_B11
ASL_A12
ASL_A3
B_ITB1
ASL_B28
ASL_A27
ASL_A20
ASL_B19
B_ITB2
B_OTA2
B_OTA1
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
ASL_B1
ASL_A11
ASL_A10
ASL_B3
VCC
ASL_B25
ASL_B27
ASL_A18
ASL_A19
GND
B_OTB2
B_OTB1
ASL_A8
ASL_A16
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
ASL_A2
ASL_B2
ASL_A1
ASL_A0
ASL_B0
ASL_B10
ASL_B9
ASL_A9
ASL_B8
VCC
ASL_A26
ASL_B26
ASL_A25
ASL_A24
ASL_B24
ASL_B18
ASL_B17
ASL_A17
ASL_B16
GND
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Figure 3143 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATF card
Table 3131 lists pins on the H601RATF card.
Table 3131 Pins on the H601RATF card
Signal Number Description
ASL_A0A31 32 Loop line A
ASL_B0B31 32 Loop line B
OTA/OTB 4 Loop line test bus
ITA/ITB 2 Circuit test bus
VCC 3 5 V power supply for the relay card
GND 2 Ground

3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion
CardH601SLTF
3.62.1 Overview
The H601SLTF card is the front access subscriber cable conversion card.
The H601SLTF card resides in the HABD, HABE and HABF frames. The D-type
connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers 32 channels of xSL subscriber signals or
16 channels of E1 signals to the cable connecting area of the frame.

3-204
3.62.2 Front Panel
There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601SLTF card. Figure 3144
DB-68 socket
SLTF

Figure 3144 Front panel of the H601SLTF card
Table 3132 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card.
When the H601SLTF card works as the xDSL subscriber cable conversion card,
"A0""A31" indicate A loop lines 031, and "B0""B31" indicate B loop lines 031.
When the H601SLTF card works as the E1 conversion card, the meanings of the
characters on the pins are as follows:
The first R or T indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively.
Table 3132 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card
1 B8/RX8-T 35 B0/RX0-R
2 A8/RX8-R 36 A0/RX0-T
3 B9/TX8-T 37 B1/TX0-R
4 A9/TX8-R 38 A1/TX0-T
5 B10/RX9-T 39 B2/RX1-R
6 A10/RX9-R 40 A2/RX1-T
7 B11/TX9-T 41 B3/TX1-R
8 A11/TX9-R 42 A3/TX1-T
9 B12/RX10-T 43 B4/RX2-R
10 A12/RX10-R 44 A4/RX2-T
11 B13/TX10-T 45 B5/TX2-R
12 A13/TX10-R 46 A5/TX2-T

3-205
13 B14/RX11-T 47 B6/RX3-R
14 A14/RX11-R 48 A6/RX3-T
15 B15/TX11-T 49 B7/TX3-R
16 A15/TX11-R 50 A7/TX3-T
19 B24/RX4-R 53 B16/RX12-T
20 A24/RX4-T 54 A16/RX12-R
21 B25/TX4-R 55 B17/TX12-T
22 A25/TX4-T 56 A17/TX12-R
23 B26/RX5-R 57 B18/RX13-T
24 A26/RX5-T 58 A18/RX13-R
25 B27/TX5-R 59 B19/TX13-T
26 A27/TX5-T 60 A19/TX13-R
27 B28/RX6-R 61 B20
28 A28/RX6-T 62 A20/RX14-R
29 B29/TX6-R 63 B21/TX14-T
30 A29/TX6-T 64 A21/TX14-R
31 B30/TX7-R 65 B22/RX15-T
32 A30/RX7-T 66 A22/RX15-R
33 B31/TX7-R 67 B23/TX15-T
34 A31/TX7-T 68 A23/TX15-R

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables

4-1
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables
The front-access cables of the UA5000 include:
Trunk cable
Subtending cable
Subscriber cable
Maintenance cable
Signal cable
Optical fiber
4.2 Trunk Cable
4.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable
The UA5000 uses the following front-access trunk cables:
E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
IPMB upstream cable
Trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
Trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF
E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000
4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
There are two types of trunk cables from DEHA to DDF. Each type provides 16 E1
channels.
When the AIUB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1
ports. In this case, the AIUB uses the 1st8th E1 channels of the trunk cable.
4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
I. Outline
Figure 41 shows the outline of the trunk cable.

4-2
X1
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
Coaxial cable
Label

Figure 41 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Table 41 describes the labels on the trunk cable.
Table 41 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Label Meaning
W1(14) E1 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals
W2(912) E1 The 9th12th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Table 42 shows the pin assignment of the trunk cable.

Note:
In Table 42, serial number "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on
the cable jacket.
The meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows:
R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.
T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.

Table 42 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to
DDF
Connector X1 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
35 Ring
36 Tip
1 R1
37 Ring 2 T1

4-3
38 Tip
39 Ring
40 Tip
3 R2
41 Ring
42 Tip
4 T2
43 Ring
44 Tip
5 R3
45 Ring
46 Tip
6 T3
47 Ring
48 Tip
7 R4
49 Ring
50 Tip
8 T4

2 Ring
1 Tip
1 R9
4 Ring
3 Tip
2 T9
6 Ring
5 Tip
3 R10
8 Ring
7 Tip
4 T10
10 Ring
9 Tip
5 R11
12 Ring
11 Tip
6 T11
14 Ring
13 Tip
7 R12
16 Ring
15 Tip
8 T12


4-4
19 Ring
20 Tip
1 R5
21 Ring
22 Tip
2 T5
23 Ring
24 Tip
3 R6
25 Ring
26 Tip
4 T6
27 Ring
28 Tip
5 R7
29 Ring
30 Tip
6 T7
31 Ring
32 Tip
7 R8
33 Ring
34 Tip
8 T8

54 Ring
53 Tip
1 R13
56 Ring
55 Tip
2 T13
58 Ring
57 Tip
3 R14
60 Ring
59 Tip
4 T14
62 Ring
61 Tip
5 R15
64 Ring
63 Tip
6 T15
66 Ring
65 Tip
7 R16

4-5
68 Ring
67 Tip
8 T16

4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
I. Outline
X1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Main label Label
Twisted pair

Figure 42 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Table 43 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Label Meaning

II. Pin assignment

Note:
In Table 44, the meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows:


4-6
Table 44 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Connector X1 Tip color & relationship R/T relationship
35 White
36 Blue
Twisted R1
37 White
38 Orange
Twisted T1
39 White
40 Green
Twisted R2
41 White
42 Brown
Twisted T2
43 White
44 Gray
Twisted R3
45 Red
46 Blue
Twisted T3
47 Red
48 Orange
Twisted R4
49 Red
50 Green
Twisted T4
19 Red
20 Brown
Twisted R5
21 Red
22 Gray
Twisted T5
23 Black
24 Blue
Twisted R6
25 Black
26 Orange
Twisted T6
27 Black
28 Green
Twisted R7
29 Black
30 Brown
Twisted T7
31 Black
32 Gray
Twisted R8
33 Yellow Twisted T8

4-7
34 Blue

2 White
1 Blue
Twisted R9
4 White
3 Orange
Twisted T9
6 White
5 Green
Twisted R10
8 White
7 Brown
Twisted T10
10 White
9 Gray
Twisted R11
12 Red
11 Blue
Twisted T11
14 Red
13 Orange
Twisted R12
16 Red
15 Green
Twisted T12
54 Red
53 Brown
Twisted R13
56 Red
55 Gray
Twisted T13
58 Black
57 Blue
Twisted R14
60 Black
59 Orange
Twisted T14
62 Black
61 Green
Twisted R15
64 Black
63 Brown
Twisted T15
66 Black Twisted R16

4-8
65 Gray
68 Yellow
67 Blue
Twisted T16

4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF
There are two types of trunk cables from APMB to DDF. Each type provides 16 E1
channels.
When the APMB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1
ports. In this case, the APMB in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses
the 1st8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the APMB in the right half uses the
9th16th E1 chanels.
4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF
I. Outline
X1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Main label Coaxial cable
Label

Figure 43 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
Table 45 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
Label Meaning


4-9
II. Pin assignment

Note:
In Table 46, SN in "Coaxial cable & SN" is the print on the cable jacket.
The meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows:
R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side.
T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side.

Table 46 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
35 Ring
36 Tip
1 R1
37 Ring
38 Tip
2 T1
39 Ring
40 Tip
3 R2
41 Ring
42 Tip
4 T2
43 Ring
44 Tip
5 R3
45 Ring
46 Tip
6 T3
47 Ring
48 Tip
7 R4
49 Ring
50 Tip
8 T4

2 Ring
1 Tip
1 R5
4 Ring 2 T5

4-10
3 Tip
6 Ring
5 Tip
3 R6
8 Ring
7 Tip
4 T6
10 Ring
9 Tip
5 R7
12 Ring
11 Tip
6 T7
14 Ring
13 Tip
7 R8
16 Ring
15 Tip
8 T8

19 Ring
20 Tip
1 R9
21 Ring
22 Tip
2 T9
23 Ring
24 Tip
3 R10
25 Ring
26 Tip
4 T10
27 Ring
28 Tip
5 R11
29 Ring
30 Tip
6 T11
31 Ring
32 Tip
7 R12
33 Ring
34 Tip
8 T12


4-11
54 Ring
53 Tip
1 R13
56 Ring
55 Tip
2 T13
58 Ring
57 Tip
3 R14
60 Ring
59 Tip
4 T14
62 Ring
61 Tip
5 R15
64 Ring
63 Tip
6 T15
66 Ring
65 Tip
7 R16
68 Ring
67 Tip
8 T16

I. Outline
X1
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
Label


4-12
Label Meaning

II. Pin assignment

Note:
In Table 48, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows:

35 White
36 Blue
Twisted R1
37 White
38 Orange
Twisted T1
39 White
40 Green
Twisted R2
41 White
42 Brown
Twisted T2
43 White
44 Gray
Twisted R3
45 Red
46 Blue
Twisted T3
47 Red
48 Orange
Twisted R4
49 Red
50 Green
Twisted T4
2 Red Twisted R5

4-13
1 Brown
4 Red
3 Gray
Twisted T5
6 Black
5 Blue
Twisted R6
8 Black
7 Orange
Twisted T6
10 Black
9 Green
Twisted R7
12 Black
11 Brown
Twisted T7
14 Black
13 Gray
Twisted R8
16 Yellow
15 Blue
Twisted T8

19 White
20 Blue
Twisted R9
21 White
22 Orange
Twisted T9
23 White
24 Green
Twisted R10
25 White
26 Brown
Twisted T10
27 White
28 Gray
Twisted R11
29 Red
30 Blue
Twisted T11
31 Red
32 Orange
Twisted R12
33 Red Twisted T12

4-14
34 Green
54 Red
53 Brown
Twisted R13
56 Red
55 Gray
Twisted T13
58 Black
57 Blue
Twisted R14
60 Black
59 Orange
Twisted T14
62 Black
61 Green
Twisted R15
64 Black
63 Brown
Twisted T15
66 Black
65 Gray
Twisted R16
68 Yellow
67 Blue
Twisted T16

4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF
I. Overview of the E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
When the APMB is configured with the E23F or E13F subcard, it provides two or one
E3 port.
When the APMB is configured with T23F or T13F subcard, it provides two or one T3
port.
The E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each
type provides one E3/T3 channel.
II. 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF

4-15
SMB coaxial
connector (female)
Main label
X1
Coaxial cable

Figure 45 Outline of the 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
III. 120-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF
The 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable can be converted to the 120-ohm trunk cable. The
conversion cable consists of two parts:
75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable
Cable to the DDF
IV. 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable
One end of the conversion cable is an SMB connector, connected to the electrical port
of the E23F, E13F, T23F or T13F subcard. The other end is a 8-pin female network
port.
Figure 46 shows the outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable.
X2
X3
SMB connector
(female) Label
1
8
8-pin network port Twisted pair Coaxial cable

Figure 46 Outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable
Table 49 describes the labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable.
Table 49 Labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable
Label Connector Meaning
TO B75 T X2 75-ohm conversion: E1 signal transmitting
TO B75 R X3 75-ohm conversion: E1 signal receiving

V. Cable to the DDF
Figure 47 shows the cable to the DDF.

4-16
8 1
8-pin network port
connector
Label
Twisted pair

Figure 47 Outline of the cable to the DDF
Table 410 describes the labels on the cable to the DDF.
Table 410 Labels on the cable to the DDF
Label Meaning
R 120-ohm conversion: E1 signal transmitting
T 120-ohm conversion: E1 signal receiving

Table 411 shows the pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF.

Note:
R: Receiving of the E3/T3 signals at the APMB side.
T: Transmitting of the E3/T3 signals at the APMB side.

Table 411 Pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF
Cable branch Connector X1 Tip color & relationship
R/T
relationship
1 Blue
W1
2 White
Twisted R
4 Orange
W2
5 White
Twisted T

4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000
There are four types of E1 trunk cables from APMB to Metro 1000. Each type provides
16 E1 channels.
75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

4-17
When the APMB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1
ports. In this case, the APMB in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses
the 1st8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the APMB in the right half uses the
9th16th E1 channels.
SS42SP1 and SS42SP2 are the E1 tributary cards of the Metro 1000.
75 ohms and 120 ohms are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal.
In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the
unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance matching
impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the
matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch of the card and the Metro 1000 is set
correctly and the data is consistent.
4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
I. Outline
X1
X9
X2
X3
X8
2mmFB wire
connector
Main label
Coaxial cable
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Label
6
a
b
c
d

Figure 48 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
Table 412 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP1
(12) E1 X2 The 1st2nd channels of E1 signals
(34) E1 X3 The 3rd4th channels of E1 signals
(56) E1 X4 The 5th6th channels of E1 signals

4-18

II. Pin assignment

Note:

SS42SP1
Connector X1 Connector X2 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
35 a5 Ring
36 a6 Tip
1 R1
37 d4 Ring
38 d3 Tip
2 T1
39 a3 Ring
40 a4 Tip
3 R2
41 d2 Ring
42 d1 Tip
4 T2

43 a5 Ring
44 a6 Tip
5 R3
45 d4 Ring 6 T3

4-19
46 d3 Tip
47 a3 Ring
48 a4 Tip
7 R4
49 d2 Ring
50 d1 Tip
8 T4

2 a5 Ring
1 a6 Tip
1 R5
4 d4 Ring
3 d3 Tip
2 T5
6 a3 Ring
5 a4 Tip
3 R6
8 d2 Ring
7 d1 Tip
4 T6

10 a5 Ring
9 a6 Tip
5 R7
12 d4 Ring
11 d3 Tip
6 T7
14 a3 Ring
13 a4 Tip
7 R8
16 d2 Ring
15 d1 Tip
8 T8

19 a5 Ring
20 a6 Tip
1 R9
21 d4 Ring
22 d3 Tip
2 T9

4-20
23 a3 Ring
24 a4 Tip
3 R10
25 d2 Ring
26 d1 Tip
4 T10

27 a5 Ring
28 a6 Tip
5 R11
29 d4 Ring
30 d3 Tip
6 T11
31 a3 Ring
32 a4 Tip
7 R12
33 d2 Ring
34 d1 Tip
8 T12

54 a5 Ring
53 a6 Tip
1 R13
56 d4 Ring
55 d3 Tip
2 T13
58 a3 Ring
57 a4 Tip
3 R14
60 d2 Ring
59 d1 Tip
4 T14

62 a5 Ring
61 a6 Tip
5 R15
64 d4 Ring
63 d3 Tip
6 T15
66 a3 Ring 7 R16

4-21
65 a4 Tip
68 d2 Ring
67 d1 Tip
8 T16

I. Outline
X1
X2
X3
X8
X9 D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
2mmFB wire
connector
Twisted pair
Main label
Label
Heat shrink tube
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
1 6
a
b
c
d

Figure 49 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP1
SS42SP1
(12) E1 X1 The 1st2nd channels of E1 signals
(34) E1 X2 The 3rd4th channels of E1 signals

4-22

II. Pin assignment

Note:

SS42SP1
Connector X1 Connector X2 Tip color & relationship R/T relationship
35 a5 White
36 a6 Blue
Twisted R1
37 d4 White
38 d3 Orange
Twisted T1
39 a3 White
40 a4 Green
Twisted R2
41 d2 White
42 d1 Brown
Twisted T2

43 a5 White
44 a6 Gray
Twisted R3
45 d4 Red
46 d3 Blue
Twisted T3
47 a3 Red
48 a4 Orange
Twisted R4
49 d2 Red
50 d1 Green
Twisted T4


4-23
2 a5 Red
1 a6 Brown
Twisted R5
4 d4 Red
3 d3 Gray
Twisted T5
6 a3 Black
5 a4 Blue
Twisted R6
8 d2 Black
7 d1 Orange
Twisted T6

10 a5 Black
9 a6 Green
Twisted R7
12 d4 Black
11 d3 Brown
Twisted T7
14 a3 Black
13 a4 Gray
Twisted R8
16 d2 Black
15 d1 Blue
Twisted T8

19 a5 White
20 a6 Blue
Twisted R9
21 d4 White
22 d3 Orange
Twisted T9
23 a3 White
24 a4 Green
Twisted R10
25 d2 White
26 d1 Brown
Twisted T10

27 a5 White Twisted R11

4-24
28 a6 Gray
29 d4 Red
30 d3 Blue
Twisted T11
31 a3 Red
32 a4 Orange
Twisted R12
33 d2 Red
34 d1 Green
Twisted T12

54 a5 Red
53 a6 Brown
Twisted R13
56 d4 Red
55 d3 Gray
Twisted T13
58 a3 Black
57 a4 Blue
Twisted R14
60 d2 Black
59 d1 Orange
Twisted T14

62 a5 Black
61 a6 Green
Twisted R15
64 d4 Black
63 d3 Brown
Twisted T15
66 a3 Black
65 a4 Gray
Twisted R16
68 d2 Black
67 d1 Blue
Twisted T16

I. Outline

4-25
X2
X5
1 6
a
b
c
d
2mmFB wire connector
Label
Main label
Coaxial cable
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
X1

Figure 410 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2
SS42SP2
(14) E1 X2 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment

Note:

SS42SP2
35 a6 Ring
36 b6 Tip
1 R1
37 d6 Ring 2 T1

4-26
38 c6 Tip
39 a4 Ring
40 a5 Tip
3 R2
41 d4 Ring
42 d5 Tip
4 T2
43 a2 Ring
44 a3 Tip
5 R3
45 d2 Ring
46 d3 Tip
6 T3
47 b1 Ring
48 a1 Tip
7 R4
49 c1 Ring
50 d1 Tip
8 T4

2 a6 Ring
1 b6 Tip
1 R5
4 d6 Ring
3 c6 Tip
2 T5
6 a4 Ring
5 a5 Tip
3 R6
8 d4 Ring
7 d5 Tip
4 T6
10 a2 Ring
9 a3 Tip
5 R7
12 d2 Ring
11 d3 Tip
6 T7
14 b1 Ring
13 a1 Tip
7 R8
16 c1 Ring
15 d1 Tip
8 T8


4-27
19 a6 Ring
20 b6 Tip
1 R9
21 d6 Ring
22 c6 Tip
2 T9
23 a4 Ring
24 a5 Tip
3 R10
25 d4 Ring
26 d5 Tip
4 T10
27 a2 Ring
28 a3 Tip
5 R11
29 d2 Ring
30 d3 Tip
6 T11
31 b1 Ring
32 a1 Tip
7 R12
33 c1 Ring
34 d1 Tip
8 T12

54 a6 Ring
53 b6 Tip
1 R13
56 d6 Ring
55 c6 Tip
2 T13
58 a4 Ring
57 a5 Tip
3 R14
60 d4 Ring
59 d5 Tip
4 T14
62 a2 Ring
61 a3 Tip
5 R15
64 d2 Ring
63 d3 Tip
6 T15
66 b1 Ring
65 a1 Tip
7 R16

4-28
68 c1 Ring
67 d1 Tip
8 T16

I. Outline
X2
X5
X1
2mmFB wire connector
Label
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
1 6
a
b
c
d
Twisted pair

Figure 411 Outline of the 120-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2
SS42SP2
(14) E1 X2 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment


4-29
Note:

SS42SP2
35 a6 White
36 b6 Blue
Twisted R1
37 d6 White
38 c6 Orange
Twisted T1
39 a4 White
40 a5 Green
Twisted R2
41 d4 White
42 d5 Brown
Twisted T2
43 a2 White
44 a3 Gray
Twisted R3
45 d2 Red
46 d3 Blue
Twisted T3
47 b1 Red
48 a1 Orange
Twisted R4
49 c1 Red
50 d1 Green
Twisted T4

2 a6 Red
1 b6 Brown
Twisted R5
4 d6 Red
3 c6 Gray
Twisted T5
6 a4 Black
5 a5 Blue
Twisted R6

4-30
8 d4 Black
7 d5 Orange
Twisted T6
10 a2 Black
9 a3 Green
Twisted R7
12 d2 Black
11 d3 Brown
Twisted T7
14 b1 Black
13 a1 Gray
Twisted R8
16 c1 Black
15 d1 Blue
Twisted T8

19 a6 White
20 b6 Blue
Twisted R9
21 d6 White
22 c6 Orange
Twisted T9
23 a4 White
24 a5 Green
Twisted R10
25 d4 White
26 d5 Brown
Twisted T10
27 a2 White
28 a3 Gray
Twisted R11
29 d2 Red
30 d3 Blue
Twisted T11
31 b1 Red
32 a1 Orange
Twisted R12
33 c1 Red
34 d1 Green
Twisted T12

54 a6 Red Twisted R13

4-31
53 b6 Brown
56 d6 Red
55 c6 Gray
Twisted T13
58 a4 Black
57 a5 Blue
Twisted R14
60 d4 Black
59 d5 Orange
Twisted T14
62 a2 Black
61 a3 Green
Twisted R15
64 d2 Black
63 d3 Brown
Twisted T15
66 b1 Black
65 a1 Gray
Twisted R16
68 c1 Black
67 d1 Blue
Twisted T16

4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF
There are two types of E1/SHDSL trunk cables from H303HSL to DDF: 75-ohm and
120-ohm. Each type provides two E1 channels and two SHDSL channels.
4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF
I. Outline

4-32
X
Main label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Coaxial cable
Twisted pair
Label

Figure 412 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Table 420 and Table 421 describe the labels on the trunk cable.
Table 420 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)
Label Meaning
T0 Tx of the 1st E1 port
R0 Rx of the 1st E1 port
T1 Tx of the 2nd E1 port
R1 Rx of the 2nd E1 port

Table 421 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)
Label Meaning
H521SDL channel 0 The 1st SHDSL port
H521SDL channel 1 The 2nd SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment
Table 422 and Table 423 show the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk
cable from H303HSL to DDF.


4-33
Note:
R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.
T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.

Table 422 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to
DDF (I)
Connector X Tip color & SN R/T relationship
36 Tip
35 Ring
1 T0
38 Tip
37 Ring
2 R0
40 Tip
39 Ring
3 T1
42 Tip
41 Ring
4 R1

DDF (II)
Connector X Tip color Tip point color Relationship Port No.
32 Pink Red
31 Pink Black
Twisted 0
34 Orange Red
33 Orange Black
Twisted 1

4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF
I. Outline

4-34
X
Main label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Twisted pair
Label

Figure 413 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Table 424 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)
Label Meaning

Table 425 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)
Label Meaning

II. Pin assignment
cable from H303HSL to DDF.


4-35
Note:
R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.
T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.

DDF (I)
Connector X Tip color Relationship R/T relationship
36 White
35 Blue
Twisted T0
38 White
37 Orange
Twisted R0
40 White
39 Green
Twisted T1
42 White
41 Brown
Twisted R1

DDF (II)
32 Pink Red
31 Pink Black
Twisted 0
34 Orange Red
33 Orange Black
Twisted 1

4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF
There are two types of E1/SHDSL trunk cables from H521SDL to DDF: 75-ohm and
120-ohm. Each type provides four E1 channels and four SHDSL channels.
4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF
I. Outline

4-36
X
Main label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Coaxial cable
Twisted pair
Label

Figure 414 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Table 428 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)
Label Meaning
T2 Tx of the 3rd E1 port
R2 Rx of the 3rd E1 port
T3 Tx of the 4th E1 port
R3 Rx of the 4th E1 port

Table 429 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)
Label Meaning
H521SDL channel 2 The 3rd SHDSL port
H521SDL channel 3 The 4th SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment
cable from H521SDL to DDF.

4-37
Note:
R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.
T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.

Table 430 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to
DDF (I)
Connector X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
36 Tip
35 Ring
1 T0
38 Tip
37 Ring
2 R0
40 Tip
39 Ring
3 T1
42 Tip
41 Ring
4 R1
44 Tip
43 Ring
5 T2
46 Tip
45 Ring
6 R2
48 Tip
47 Ring
7 T3
50 Tip
49 Ring
8 R3

DDF (II)
28 Pink Red
27 Pink Black
Twisted 0
30 Orange Red
29 Orange Black
Twisted 1

4-38
32 Green Red
31 Green Black
Twisted 2
34 Blue Red
33 Blue Black
Twisted 3

4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF
I. Outline
X
Main label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Twisted pair
Label

Figure 415 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Table 432 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)
Label Meaning
T2 Tx of the 3rd E1 port
R2 Rx of the 3rd E1 port
T3 Tx of the 4th E1 port
R3 Rx of the 4th E1 port


4-39
Table 433 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)
Label Meaning
H521SDL channel 2 The 3rd SHDSL port
H521SDL channel 3 The 4th SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment
cable from H521SDL to DDF.

Note:
R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.
T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.

DDF (I)
Connector X Tip color & Relationship R/T relationship
36 White
35 Blue
Twisted T0
38 White
37 Orange
Twisted R0
40 White
39 Green
Twisted T1
42 White
41 Brown
Twisted R1
44 White
43 Gray
Twisted T2
46 Red
45 Blue
Twisted R2
48 Red Twisted T3

4-40
Connector X Tip color & Relationship R/T relationship
47 Orange
50 Red
49 Green
Twisted R3

DDF (II)
28 Pink Red
27 Pink Black
Twisted 0
30 Orange Red
29 Orange Black
Twisted 1
32 Green Red
31 Green Black
Twisted 2
34 Blue Red
33 Blue Black
Twisted 3

4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable
The FE upstream cable uses the straight through cable.
4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB has two types: 75-ohm and
120-ohm. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.
4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
I. Outline

4-41
X1 X2
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
Coaxial cable
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)

APMB
II. Pin assignment

Note:

Table 436 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
Connector X1 Connector X2 Coaxial cable & SN
35 37 Ring
36 38 Tip
1
37 35 Ring
38 36 Tip
2
39 41 Ring
40 42 Tip
3
41 39 Ring
42 40 Tip
4
43 45 Ring
44 46 Tip
5
45 43 Ring
46 44 Tip
6
47 48 Ring
48 50 Tip
7

4-42
49 47 Ring
50 48 Tip
8

2 4 Ring
1 3 Tip
1
4 2 Ring
3 1 Tip
2
6 8 Ring
5 7 Tip
3
8 6 Ring
7 5 Tip
4
10 12 Ring
9 11 Tip
5
12 10 Ring
11 9 Tip
6
14 16 Ring
13 15 Tip
7
16 14 Ring
15 13 Tip
8

19 21 Ring
20 22 Tip
1
21 19 Ring
22 20 Tip
2
23 25 Ring
24 26 Tip
3
25 23 Ring
26 24 Tip
4
27 29 Ring 5

4-43
28 30 Tip
29 27 Ring
30 28 Tip
6
31 33 Ring
32 34 Tip
7
33 31 Ring
34 32 Tip
8

54 56 Ring
53 55 Tip
1
56 54 Ring
55 53 Tip
2
58 60 Ring
57 59 Tip
3
60 58 Ring
59 57 Tip
4
62 64 Ring
61 63 Tip
5
64 62 Ring
63 61 Tip
6
66 68 Ring
65 67 Tip
7
68 66 Ring
67 65 Tip
8

I. Outline

4-44
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
Twisted pair
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
X1 X2
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)

APMB
II. Pin assignment
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
35 37
36 38
Twisted
37 35
38 36
Twisted
39 41
40 42
Twisted
41 39
42 40
Twisted
43 45
44 46
Twisted
45 43
46 44
Twisted
47 49
48 50
Twisted
49 47
50 48
Twisted
2 4
1 3
Twisted
4 2 Twisted

4-45
3 1
6 8
5 7
Twisted
8 6
7 5
Twisted
10 12
9 11
Twisted
12 10
11 9
Twisted
14 16
13 15
Twisted
16 14
15 13
Twisted

19 21
20 22
Twisted
21 19
22 20
Twisted
23 25
24 26
Twisted
25 23
26 24
Twisted
27 29
28 30
Twisted
29 27
30 28
Twisted
31 33
32 34
Twisted
33 31
34 32
Twisted
54 56 Twisted

4-46
53 55
56 54
55 53
Twisted
58 60
57 59
Twisted
60 58
59 57
Twisted
62 64
61 63
Twisted
64 62
63 61
Twisted
66 68
65 67
Twisted
68 66
67 65
Twisted

4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF
The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and
120-ohm. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.
PVU8/RSU8 can provide eight E1 ports. The PVU8/RSU8 in the left half of the frame
(front view of the frame) uses the 1st8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the
PVU8/RSU8 in the right half uses the 9th16th E1 channels.
PVU4/RSU4 can provide four E1 ports. The PVU4/RSU4 in the left half of the frame
(front view of the frame) uses the first four E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the
4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF
This trunk cable is the same as the trunk cable from APMB to DDF.
4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro
1000
The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 has four types, each of
which provides 16 E1 channels.

4-47
75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
PVU8/RSU8 can provide eight E1 ports. The PVU8/RSU8 in the left half of the frame
PVU4/RSU4 can provide four E1 ports. The PVU4/RSU4 in the left half of the frame
75 ohms and 120 ohms are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal.
In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the
unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance matching
impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the
matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch of the card and the Metro 1000 is set
correctly and the data is consistent.
4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000
The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 is the same as the
trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000.
4.3 Subtending Cable
4.3.1 Overview of Subtending Cable
The subtending cables include:
HW cable
LVDS cable of the slave frame
LVDS cable of the extended frame
4.3.2 HW Cable
I. Outline
Figure 418 shows the outline of the HW cable.
X1 X2
D-type connector
(28-pin, male)
Twisted pair
Pos.28
Pos.14
Pos.13
Pos.1
D-type connector
(28-pin, male)

Figure 418 Outline of the HW cable

4-48
II. Pin assignment
Table 438 shows the pin assignment of the HW cable.
Table 438 Pin assignment of the HW cable
3 3
4 4
Twisted
5 5
6 6
Twisted
7 7
8 8
Twisted
9 9
10 10
Twisted
11 11
12 12
Twisted
13 13
14 14
Twisted
15 15
16 16
Twisted
17 17
18 18
Twisted
19 19
20 20
Twisted
21 21
22 22
Twisted
23 23
24 24
Twisted
25 25
26 26
Twisted
27 27
28 28
Twisted


4-49
4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame
I. Outline
Figure 419 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.
X1
X2
Label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair

Figure 419 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.
II. Pin assignment
Table 439 lists the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.
Table 439 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for slave frame
3 3
1 1
2 2
Twisted
4 4
5 6
6 5
Twisted
9 9
7 37
8 38
Twisted
10 10
11 11
12 12
Twisted
15 15
13 13
14 14
Twisted
18 18
19 49
Twisted

4-50
20 50
24 24
25 25
26 26
Twisted
30 30
31 61
32 62
Twisted
36 36
37 7
38 8
Twisted
42 42
43 43
44 44
Twisted
48 48
49 19
50 20
Twisted
53 53
51 51
52 52
Twisted
54 54
55 55
56 56
Twisted
60 60
61 31
62 32
Twisted
66 66
67 67
68 68
Twisted


4-51
4.3.4 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame
I. Outline
Table 420 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.
X1
X2
Label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair

Figure 420 Outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.
II. Pin assignment
Table 440 lists the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.
Table 440 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for extended frame
1 1
2 2
3 3
Twisted
4 4
5 5
6 6
Twisted
7 7
8 8
9 9
Twisted
10 10
11 11
12 12
Twisted
13 13
14 14
15 15
Twisted
17 17
18 18
Twisted

4-52
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
Twisted
23 23
24 24
25 25
Twisted
26 26
27 27
28 28
Twisted
29 29
30 30
31 31
Twisted
37 37
35 35
36 36
Twisted
40 40
38 38
39 39
Twisted
43 43
41 41
42 42
Twisted
46 46
44 44
45 45
Twisted
49 49
47 47
48 48
Twisted
53 53
51 51
52 52
Twisted
56 56 Twisted

4-53
54 54
55 55

59 59
57 57
58 58
Twisted
62 62
60 60
61 61
Twisted
65 65
63 63
64 64
Twisted
66 66
67 67
68 68
Twisted
16 16
50 50
Twisted
33 33
32 32
Twisted

4.4 Subscriber Cable
4.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable
The front-access subscriber cable includes:
16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
ATIA subscriber cable
EAUA subscriber cable
4.4.2 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable
I. Relative cards
The 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable is suitable for the following cards:
Narrowband line card: ASL, DSL, VFB and CDI
Broadband line card: SDLB

4-54
Narrowband and broadband combo line card: CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI
The ports of the cable used by line cards are shown in the following figures.

Note:
One pane in the following two figures indicates one subscriber port. When the pane is
filled, the line card uses this port. When it is not filled, the line card does not use this
port.

ASL, VFB, CDI, SDLB, CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI
0 15

DSL
0 7

II. Outline
Figure 421 shows the outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
X1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Twisted pair

Figure 421 Outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
III. Pin assignment
Table 441 shows the pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 441 Pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Connector X1 Tip color and relationship Port No.
36 Blue
35 White
Twisted 0
38 Orange
37 White
Twisted 1

4-55
Connector X1 Tip color and relationship Port No.
40 Green
39 White
Twisted 2
42 Brown
41 White
Twisted 3
44 Gray
43 White
Twisted 4
46 Blue
45 Red
Twisted 5
48 Orange
47 Red
Twisted 6
50 Green
49 Red
Twisted 7
20 Brown
19 Red
Twisted 8
22 Gray
21 Red
Twisted 9
24 Blue
23 Black
Twisted 10
26 Orange
25 Black
Twisted 11
28 Green
27 Black
Twisted 12
30 Brown
29 Black
Twisted 13
32 Gray
31 Black
Twisted 14
34 Blue
33 Yellow
Twisted 15


4-56
4.4.3 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable
I. Relative cards
The 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable is suitable for the following cards:
Narrowband line card: ASL, DSL, VFB and CDI
Broadband line card: SDLB, ADLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC, ADMI, VDLA and
VDLB
Narrowband and broadband combo line card: CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI
The ports of the cable used by line cards are shown as follows.

Note:
One pane in the following two figures indicates one subscriber port. When the pane is
filled, the line card uses this port. When it is not filled, the line card does not use this
port.

32-port analog line card
31
0
16
15

16-port analog line card, VFB, CDI, SDLB, CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI
0 7
15 8

ADLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC, ADMI, VDLA and VDLB
0-15 POTS
0-15 LINE

DSL
0 7

II. Outline
Figure 422 shows the outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

4-57
X1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Twisted pair

Figure 422 Outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
III. Pin assignment
Table 442 shows the pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 442 Pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable
Connector X1
Cable binder
color
Tip color & relationship Port No.
36 White
35 Blue
Twisted 0
38 White
37 Orange
Twisted 1
40 White
39 Green
Twisted 2
42 White
41 Brown
Twisted 3
44 White
43 Gray
Twisted 4
46 Red
45 Blue
Twisted 5
48 Red
47 Orange
Twisted 6
50 Red
49
Blue
Green
Twisted 7
2 Red
1 Brown
Twisted 8
4 Red
3
Blue
Gray
Twisted 9

4-58
Connector X1
Cable binder
color
6 Black
5 Blue
Twisted 10
8 Black
7 Orange
Twisted 11
10 Black
9 Green
Twisted 12
12 Black
11 Brown
Twisted 13
14 Black
13 Gray
Twisted 14
16 Yellow
15

Blue
Twisted 15
54 White
53 Blue
Twisted 16
56 White
55 Orange
Twisted 17
58 White
57 Green
Twisted 18
60 White
59 Brown
Twisted 19
62 White
61 Gray
Twisted 20
64 Red
63 Blue
Twisted 21
66 Red
65 Orange
Twisted 22
68 Red
67
Orange
Green
Twisted 23
20 Red
19 Brown
Twisted 24
22
Orange
Red Twisted 25

4-59
Connector X1
Cable binder
color
21 Gray
24 Black
23 Blue
Twisted 26
26 Black
25 Orange
Twisted 27
28 Black
27 Green
Twisted 28
30 Black
29 Brown
Twisted 29
32 Black
31 Gray
Twisted 30
34 Yellow
33

Blue
Twisted 31

4.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable
I. Relative cards
The ATIA subscriber cable is used on the ATIA card.
II. Outline
Figure 423 shows the outline of the ATIA subscriber cable.
X1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Twisted pair

Figure 423 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable
III. Pin assignment
Table 443 shows the pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable.

4-60
Table 443 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable
Connector X1 Tip color & tip definition Port No.
36 White Line A
38 Blue Line B
40 White Line C
42 Orange Line D
44 White Line E1
46 Green Line E2
48 White Line M1
50 Brown Line M2
1

2 White Line A
1 Gray Line B
4 Red Line C
3 Blue Line D
6 Red Line E1
5 Orange Line E2
8 Red Line M1
7 Green Line M2
2

35 Red Line A
37 Brown Line B
39 Red Line C
41 Gray Line D
43 Black Line E1
45 Blue Line E2
47 Black Line M1
49 Orange Line M2
3


4-61
20 Black Line A
22 Green Line B
24 Black Line C
26 Brown Line D
28 Black Line E1
30 Gray Line E2
32 Yellow Line M1
34 Blue Line M2
4

62 Yellow Line A
61 Orange Line B
64 Yellow Line C
63 Green Line D
66 Yellow Line E1
65 Brown Line E2
68 Yellow Line M1
67 Gray Line M2
5

19 Purple Line A
21 Blue Line B
23 Purple Line C
25 Orange Line D
27 Purple Line E1
29 Green Line E2
31 Purple Line M1
33 Brown Line M2
6


4-62
4.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable
I. Relative cards
The EAUA subscriber cable is suitable for the EAUA card.
II. Outline
Figure 424 shows the outline of the EAUA subscriber cable.
X7
Network port
connector
X2 X
8 1
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
X5
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
X3
X1
X4
X6
X8
Twisted pair
Label

Figure 424 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable
Table 444 describes the labels on the subscriber cable.
Table 444 Labels on the EAUA subscriber cable
Channel1 X1 The 1st channel of signal
Channel2 X2 The 2nd channel of signal
Channel3 X3 The 3rd channel of signal
Channel4 X4 The 4th channel of signal

III. Pin assignment
Table 445 shows the pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.
Table 445 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable
Connector X Connector X1 Tip color & relationship Port No.
36 1 White
35 2 Black
Twisted
0

4-63
38 3 White
37 6 Brown
Twisted

40 1 White
39 2 Black
Twisted
42 3 White
41 6 Brown
Twisted
1

44 1 White
43 2 Black
Twisted
46 3 White
45 6 Brown
Twisted
2

48 1 White
47 2 Black
Twisted
50 3 White
49 6 Brown
Twisted
3

20 1 White
19 2 Black
Twisted
22 3 White
21 6 Brown
Twisted
4

24 1 White
23 2 Black
Twisted
26 3 White Twisted
5

4-64
25 6 Brown

28 1 White
27 2 Black
Twisted
30 3 White
29 6 Brown
Twisted
6

32 1 White
31 2 Black
Twisted
34 3 White
33 6 Brown
Twisted
7

4.5 Maintenance Cable
4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable
The front-access maintenance cables of the UA5000 include:
Local maintenance serial port cable
Network cable
4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable
I. Overview
The local maintenance serial port cable is used for debugging or remote
maintenance.
One end of the cable is a 8-pin network connector, connected to the card. The other
end is a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector. When the cable is to connect with a PC,
use the DB-9 female connector.
II. Pin assignment
Figure 425 shows the outline of the maintenance cable.

4-65
D-type connector
(25-pin, female)
Label
Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45)
1
8
D-type connector
(9-pin, female)
X1
X2
X3
POS.1 POS.14
POS.25 POS.13
Pos.1 Pos.6
Pos.5 Pos.9

Figure 425 Outline of the local maintenance cable
Table 446 shows its pin assignment.
Table 446 Pin assignment of the maintenance cable
Connector Match-up
X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X1 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4
X3 8 6 2 5 5 3 4 7

4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable
There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.
The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE)
with the network.
The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.
RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet ports. They can be connected with
Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP).
For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment
without repeater is 100 m. When repeaters are used, the maximum space between
repeaters is 5 m. Due to the delay and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can
be used. Therefore, the maximum distance between two sites is 205 m.
To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6
are just two cable cores of the twisted pair.

4-66
4.5.4 Straight Through Cable
I. Outline
Figure 426 shows the outline of the straight through cable.
X1 X2
1
8
1
8

Figure 426 Outline of the straight through cable
II. Pin assignment
Table 447 shows the pin assignment of the straight through cable.
Table 447 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Tip color Connector X2
1 White and orange 1
2 Orange 2
3 White and green 3
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 6
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

4.5.5 Cross Over Cable
I. Outline
Figure 427 shows the outline of the cross over cable.
X1 X2
1
8
1
8

Figure 427 Outline of the cross over cable

4-67
Table 448 shows the pin assignment of the cross over cable.
Table 448 Pin assignment of the cross over cable
Connector X1 Tip color Connector X2
1 White and orange 3
2 Orange 6
3 White and green 1
4 Blue 4
5 White and blue 5
6 Green 2
7 White and brown 7
8 Brown 8

4.6 Signal Cable
The front-access signal cables of the UA5000 include:
Test and alarm cable
Test and alarm subtending cable
4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable
I. Outline
Figure 428 shows the outline of the test and alarm cable.
D-type connector
(28-pin, male)
Label
Main label
X1
X2
X6
X5
X4
X7
X3
8-pin network
port connector
T2500J terminal 4-pin connector
Pos.28
Pos.14
Pos.13
Pos.1
1
8
8 1
4
1

Figure 428 Outline of the test and alarm cable


4-68
Note:
X1 and X2 are used for inter-frame subtending.
X3X7 are used to connect with monitoring ports in the environment monitoring
unit.

Table 449 lists the label prints on the test and alarm cable.
Table 449 Label prints on the test and alarm cable
HWTF STACK IN X2 Connecting with the HWTF card.
ESC0 X4
ESC1 X3
N-RS485 X5
B-RS485 X6
FAN ALARM X7
Connecting with the environment
monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment
Table 450 shows the pin assignment of the test and alarm cable.
Table 450 Pin assignment of the test and alarm cable
1 1
2 2
Twisted
3 3
4 4
Twisted
5 5
6 6
Twisted
15 15
16 16
Twisted
17 17
18 18
Twisted


4-69
23 7
9 3
Twisted
7 6 -

24 7
10 3
Twisted
8 6 -

25 1
26 2
Twisted
27 4
28 5
Twisted

11 1
12 2
Twisted
13 4
14 5
Twisted

20 2
19 3
Twisted

4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable
I. Outline
Figure 429 shows the outline of the test and alarm subtending cable.

4-70
D-type connector
(28-pin, male)
Label Main label
4-pin connector
X1
X2
X3
Pos.28
Pos.1
Pos.14
Pos.13 1
4

Figure 429 Outline of the test and alarm subtending cable

Note:
X1 and X2 are used for inter-frame subtending.
X3 is used to connect with the corresponding monitoring port in the environment
monitor unit.

Table 451 lists the label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable.
Table 451 Label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable
HWTF STACK OUT X2 Connecting with the HWTF card.
FAN ALARM X3
Connecting with the environment
monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment
Table 452 lists the pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable.
Table 452 Pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable
1 1
2 2
Twisted
3 3
4 4
Twisted
5 5
6 6
Twisted

4-71
15 15
16 16
Twisted
17 17
18 18
Twisted

20 2
19 3
Twisted

4.7 Optical Fiber
The APMB/IPMB/AIUB card can provide different optical ports through the different
optical subcards. In this way, the UA5000 can connect with the upstream and
downstream equipment through optical fibers.
4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type
Optical fibers fall into two types: single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical
fibers, which have different transmission distances.
Table 453 lists the optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000, as well as their
transmission distances.
Table 453 Optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000
Subcard Description
Transmission
distance
Card
H601V2HAF
2-port 622 M VP Ring optical
port subcard, single-mode
15 km APMB
H601V2HAG
40 km APMB
H602V1HAF
port subcard, multi-mode
15 km
2 km
APMB
H602V2HAG
40 km APMB

4-72
Subcard Description
Transmission
distance
Card
H602V1HAF
15 km
2 km
APMB
H602V1HAG
40 km
2 km
APMB
H602V1HTF
15 km APMB
H602V1HTG
40 km APMB
H602V2HCF
15 km APMB
H602V2HCG
40 km APMB
H602V1HCF
15 km
2 km
APMB
H602V1HCG
40 km
2 km
APMB
H602V1HEF
15 km APMB
H602V1HEG
40 km APMB
H601O1CNH
1-port 155 M ATM optical port
subcard, single-mode
60 km APMB
H601O2CNH
60 km APMB
H601O2CNG
30 km APMB
H601O2CNB
subcard, multi-mode
2 km APMB
H601O2FNF
2-port 10/100 M Ethernet
optical port subcard,
single-mode
15 km IPMB
H601O2FNB
multi-mode
2 km IPMB

4-73
Subcard Description
Transmission
distance
Card
H601O1FNF
single-mode
15 km IPMB
H601O1FNB
multi-mode
2 km IPMB
H601O2GNA
2-port GE Ethernet optical port
subcard, multi-mode
500 m IPMB
H601O2GNE
10 km IPMB
H601O2GNG
40 km IPMB
H601O1GNE
10 km IPMB
H601O1GNA
subcard, multi-mode
500 m IPMB
H601O1GNG
40 km IPMB
H601O1CNG
30 km AIUB
H601O1CNB
subcard, multi-mode
2 km AIUB
H601O2CNG
30 km AIUB
H601O2CNB
subcard, multi-mode
2 km AIUB

4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria
1) Length
It depends on the specific survey result.
2) Single-mode/Multi-mode
It depends on the types of optical port subcards.
3) Optical port type
SC/PC optical port adopts a square connector and FC/PC optical port adopts a round
connector. According to the shapes of the optical ports of the equipment connected to
both ends of the fiber, there are three combinations:
Square connectors at both ends: SC/PCSC/PC

4-74
Round connectors at both ends: FC/PCFC/PC
Square connector at one end and round connector at the other end:
FC/PCSC/PC
4.7.3 Optical Port Connector
The common optical connectors include LC/SC/PC, ST/PC, FC/PC, MTRJ and LC
connectors, as shown in Table 454.
Table 454 Common optical connectors

SC/PC optical connector

ST/PC optical connector

FC/PC optical connector

MTRJ optical connector

LC/PC optical connector
-

The UA5000 uses SC/PC and MTRJ/PC optical connectors. According to different
opposite equipment, four types of optical patchcords can be selected, which are
SC/PC-FC/PC, SC/PC-SC/PC, MTRJ-SC/PC and MTRJ-FC/PC.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables

5-1
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables
The rear-access cables of the UA5000 include:
Trunk cable
Subtending cable
Subscriber cable
Maintenance cable
Signal cable
5.2 Trunk Cable
5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable
The UA5000 uses the following types of rear-access trunk cables:
E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
Subtending cable of IPMB
Upstream cable of IPMB
E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF
The E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm E1 trunk cable and
120-ohm E1 trunk cable. Each E1 trunk cable provides 16 E1 channels.
When the APMB card holds the H601CESA or H601E8IA subboard, the APMB card
can provide eight E1 ports. The APMB in the left half of the service frame (front view)
uses the first eight E1 ports, and the APMB in the right half uses the last eight E1
ports.

5-2
I. Outline
Figure 51 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Coaxial cable
X1
Label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35

II. Pin assignment
Table 51 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable from APMB to DDF.

Note:
In Table 51, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket.
R0: receiving of the first channel of E1 signals.
T0: transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals.

X1 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
34 Tip
33 Ring
1 R0
32 Tip
31 Ring
2 T0
30 Tip
29 Ring
3 R1
28 Tip
27 Ring
4 T1

5-3
26 Tip
25 Ring
5 R2
24 Tip
23 Ring
6 T2
22 Tip
21 Ring
7 R3
20 Tip
19 Ring
8 T3
50 Tip
49 Ring
9 R4
48 Tip
47 Ring
10 T4
46 Tip
45 Ring
11 R5
44 Tip
43 Ring
12 T5
42 Tip
41 Ring
13 R6
40 Tip
39 Ring
14 T6
38 Tip
37 Ring
15 R7
36 Tip
35 Ring
16 T7
68 Ring
67 Tip
1 R8
66 Ring
65 Tip
2 T8
64 Ring
63 Tip
3 R9
62 Ring
61 Tip
4 T9

5-4
60 Ring
59 Tip
5 R10
58 Ring
57 Tip
6 T10
56 Ring
55 Tip
7 R11
54 Ring
53 Tip
8 T11
16 Ring
15 Tip
9 R12
14 Ring
13 Tip
10 T12
12 Ring
11 Tip
11 R13
10 Ring
9 Tip
12 T13
8 Ring
7 Tip
13 R14
6 Ring
5 Tip
14 T14
4 Ring
3 Tip
15 R15
2 Ring
1 Tip
16 T15

I. Outline

5-5
Main label
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
X1
Twisted pair
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Label

II. Pin assignment
Table 52 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to
DDF.

Note:
R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals.
T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals.

X1 Tip color and relationship R/T relationship
34 White
33 Blue
Twisted R1
32 White
31 Orange
Twisted T1
30 White
29 Green
Twisted R2
28 White
27 Brown
Twisted T2
26 White
25 Gray
Twisted R3
24 Red Twisted T3

5-6
23 Blue
22 Red
21 Orange
Twisted R4
20 Red
19 Green
Twisted T4
50 Red
49 Brown
Twisted R5
48 Red
47 Gray
Twisted T5
46 Black
45 Blue
Twisted R6
44 Black
43 Orange
Twisted T6
42 Black
41 Green
Twisted R7
40 Black
39 Brown
Twisted T7
38 Black
37 Gray
Twisted R8
36 Yellow
35 Blue
Twisted T8
68 White
67 Blue
Twisted R9
66 White
65 Orange
Twisted T9
64 White
63 Green
Twisted R10
62 White
61 Brown
Twisted T10
60 White
59 Gray
Twisted R11
58 Red Twisted T11

5-7
57 Blue
56 Red
55 Orange
Twisted R12
54 Red
53 Green
Twisted T12
16 Red
15 Brown
Twisted R13
14 Red
13 Gray
Twisted T13
12 Black
11 Blue
Twisted R14
10 Black
9 Orange
Twisted T14
8 Black
7 Green
Twisted R15
6 Black
5 Brown
Twisted T15
4 Black
3 Gray
Twisted R16
2 Yellow
1 Blue
Twisted T16

The E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each
type provides two E3 channels.
I. Outline

5-8
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Main label
Coaxial cable
Label
SMB coaxial connector
X1 X2
X3
X4
X5

Table 53 shows the labels on the 75-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.
R0 X2 Receiving of the 1st E3 signals
T0 X3 Transmitting of the 1st E3 signals
R1 X4 Receiving of the 2nd E3 signals
T1 X5 Transmitting of the 2nd E3 signals

II. Pin assignment
Table 54 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E3 cable from APMB to DDF.

Note:

X1 Coaxial cable R/T relationship
34 Tip
33 Ring
R0
32 Tip
31 Ring
T0

5-9
X1 Coaxial cable R/T relationship
30 Tip
29 Ring
R1
28 Tip
27 Ring
T1

I. Outline
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Main label
Twisted pair
Label
X1

Table 55 shows the labels on the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.
Label Meaning
R0 Receiving of the 1st E3 signals
T0 Transmitting of the 1st E3 signals
R1 Receiving of the 2nd E3 signals
T1 Transmitting of the 2nd E3 signals

II. Pin assignment
DDF.


5-10
Note:

34 White
33 Blue
Twisted R0
32 White
31 Orange
Twisted T0
30 White
29 Green
Twisted R1
28 White
27 Brown
Twisted T1

5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000
The E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 has four types, each of which provides
16 E1 ports:
symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch
of the card and the Metro 1000 is set correctly and the data is consistent.
I. Outline
Figure 55 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP1.

5-11
X1
Coaxial cable
1 6
a
b
c
d
Main label
Label
X2
X3
X8
X9
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
Pos.68 Pos.34
Pos.35 Pos.1

Table 57 describes the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.
Table 57 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to
Metro 1000 SS42SP1
|12|E1 X2 The 1st2nd channels of E1 signals
|34|E1 X3 The 3rd4th channels of E1 signals
|56|E1 X4 The 5th6th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Metro 1000 SS42SP1.

Note:
In Table 58, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket.


5-12
SS42SP1
X1 X2 Coaxial cable & SN
34 a6 Tip
33 a5 Ring
1
32 d3 Tip
31 d4 Ring
2
30 a4 Tip
29 a3 Ring
3
28 d1 Tip
27 d2 Ring
4

26 a6 Tip
25 a5 Ring
5
24 d3 Tip
23 d4 Ring
6
22 a4 Tip
21 a3 Ring
7
20 d1 Tip
19 d2 Ring
8

50 a6 Tip
49 a5 Ring
9
48 d3 Tip
47 d4 Ring
10
46 a4 Tip
45 a3 Ring
11
44 d1 Tip
43 d2 Ring
12


5-13
42 a6 Tip
41 a5 Ring
13
40 d3 Tip
39 d4 Ring
14
38 a4 Tip
37 a3 Ring
15
36 d1 Tip
35 d2 Ring
16

68 a5 Ring
67 a6 Tip
1
66 d4 Ring
65 d3 Tip
2
64 a3 Ring
63 a4 Tip
3
62 d2 Ring
61 d1 Tip
4

60 a5 Ring
59 a6 Tip
5
58 d4 Ring
57 d3 Tip
6
56 a3 Ring
55 a4 Tip
7
54 d2 Ring
53 d1 Tip
8

16 a5 Ring 9

5-14
15 a6 Tip
14 d4 Ring
13 d3 Tip
10
12 a3 Ring
11 a4 Tip
11
10 d2 Ring
9 d1 Tip
12

8 a5 Ring
7 a6 Tip
13
6 d4 Ring
5 d3 Tip
14
4 a3 Ring
3 a4 Tip
15
2 d2 Ring
1 d1 Tip
16

I. Outline
Figure 56 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.

5-15
X1
Twisted pair
1 6
a
b
c
d
Main label
Label
X2
X3
X8
X9
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
Pos.68 Pos.34
Pos.35 Pos.1

Figure 56 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42
SP1
1000 SS42SP1.
Metro 1000 SS42SP1
|12|E1 X2 The 1st2nd channels of E1 signals
|34|E1 X3 The 3rd4th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Metro 1000 SS42SP1.
SS42SP1
X1 X2 Tip color Relationship
34 a6 White
33 a5 Blue
Twisted

5-16
32 d3 White
31 d4 Orange
Twisted
30 a4 White
29 a3 Green
Twisted
28 d1 White
27 d2 Brown
Twisted

26 a6 White
25 a5 Gray
Twisted
24 d3 Red
23 d4 Blue
Twisted
22 a4 Red
21 a3 Orange
Twisted
20 d1 Red
19 d2 Green
Twisted

50 a6 Red
49 a5 Brown
Twisted
48 d3 Red
47 d4 Gray
Twisted
46 a4 Black
45 a3 Blue
Twisted
44 d1 Black
43 d2 Orange
Twisted

42 a6 Black
41 a5 Green
Twisted
40 d3 Black Twisted

5-17
39 d4 Brown
38 a4 Black
37 a3 Gray
Twisted
36 d1 Yellow
35 d2 Blue
Twisted

68 a5 White
67 a6 Blue
Twisted
66 d4 White
65 d3 Orange
Twisted
64 a3 White
63 a4 Green
Twisted
62 d2 White
61 d1 Brown
Twisted

60 a5 White
59 a6 Gray
Twisted
58 d4 Red
57 d3 Blue
Twisted
56 a3 Red
55 a4 Orange
Twisted
54 d2 Red
53 d1 Green
Twisted

16 a5 Red
15 a6 Brown
Twisted
14 d4 Red
13 d3 Gray
Twisted

5-18
12 a3 Black
11 a4 Blue
Twisted
10 d2 Black
9 d1 Orange
Twisted

8 a5 Black
7 a6 Green
Twisted
6 d4 Black
5 d3 Brown
Twisted
4 a3 Black
3 a4 Gray
Twisted
2 d2 Yellow
1 d1 Blue
Twisted

I. Outline
Figure 57 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP2.
X1
Coaxial cable
1 6
a
b
c
d
Main label
Label
X2
X3
X4
X5
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
Pos.68 Pos.34
Pos.35 Pos.1

1000 SS42SP2.

5-19
Metro 1000 SS42SP2
|14|E1 X2 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals
|58|E1 X3 5th8th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Metro 1000 SS42SP2.

Note:
In Table 512, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable
jacket.

SS42SP2
34 b6 Tip
33 a6 Ring
1
32 c6 Tip
31 d6 Ring
2
30 a5 Tip
29 a4 Ring
3
28 d5 Tip
27 d4 Ring
4
26 a3 Tip
25 a2 Ring
5
24 d3 Tip
23 d2 Ring
6
22 a1 Tip 7

5-20
21 b1 Ring
20 d1 Tip
19 c1 Ring
8

50 b6 Tip
49 a6 Ring
9
48 c6 Tip
47 d6 Ring
10
46 a5 Tip
45 a4 Ring
11
44 d5 Tip
43 d4 Ring
12
42 a3 Tip
41 a2 Ring
13
40 d3 Tip
39 d2 Ring
14
38 a1 Tip
37 b1 Ring
15
36 d1 Tip
35 c1 Ring
16

68 a6 Ring
67 b6 Tip
1
66 d6 Ring
65 c6 Tip
2
64 a4 Ring
63 a5 Tip
3
62 d4 Ring
61 d5 Tip
4

5-21
60 a2 Ring
59 a3 Tip
5
58 d2 Ring
57 d3 Tip
6
56 b1 Ring
55 a1 Tip
7
54 c1 Ring
53 d1 Tip
8

16 a6 Ring
15 b6 Tip
9
14 d6 Ring
13 c6 Tip
10
12 a4 Ring
11 a5 Tip
11
10 d4 Ring
9 d5 Tip
12
8 a2 Ring
7 a3 Tip
13
6 d2 Ring
5 d3 Tip
14
4 b1 Ring
3 a1 Tip
15
2 c1 Ring
1 d1 Tip
16

I. Outline
Figure 58 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro
1000 SS42SP2.

5-22
X1
Twisted pair
1 6
a
b
c
d
Main label
Label
X2
X3
X4
X5
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Wire connector
(4 x 60-pin, female)
Pos.68 Pos.34
Pos.35 Pos.1

Figure 58 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000
SS42SP2
1000 SS42SP2.
Metro 1000 SS42SP2
|14|E1 X2 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Metro 1000 SS42SP2.
SS42SP2
X1 Tip color X2 Relationship
34 White b6
33 Blue a6
Twisted
32 White c6
31 Orange d6
Twisted
30 White a5
29 Green a4
Twisted

5-23
28 White d5
27 Brown d4
Twisted
26 White a3
25 Gray a2
Twisted
24 Red d3
23 Blue d2
Twisted
22 Red a1
21 Orange b1
Twisted
20 Red d1
19 Green c1
Twisted

50 Red b6
49 Brown a6
Twisted
48 Red c6
47 Gray d6
Twisted
46 black a5
45 Blue a4
Twisted
44 black d5
43 Orange d4
Twisted
42 black a3
41 Green a2
Twisted
40 black d3
39 Brown d2
Twisted
38 black a1
37 Gray b1
Twisted
36 Yellow d1
35 Blue c1
Twisted

68 White a6 Twisted

5-24
67 Blue b6
66 White d6
65 Orange c6
Twisted
64 White a4
63 Green a5
Twisted
62 White d4
61 Brown d5
Twisted
60 White a2
59 Gray a3
Twisted
58 Red d2
57 Blue d3
Twisted
56 Red b1
55 Orange a1
Twisted
54 Red c1
53 Green d1
Twisted

16 Red a6
15 Brown b6
Twisted
14 Red d6
13 Gray c6
Twisted
12 black a4
11 Blue a5
Twisted
10 black d4
9 Orange d5
Twisted
8 black a2
7 Green a3
Twisted
6 black d2
5 Brown d3
Twisted
4 black b1
3 Gray a1
Twisted
2 Yellow c1 Twisted

5-25
1 Blue d1

5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
The E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and
120-ohm. Each type of the cable provides eight E1 channels.
I. Outline
Figure 59 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to
DDF.
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Label
Main label
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.15
Pos.31
Coaxial cable

Figure 59 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Figure 515describes the labels on the E1 trunk cable.
AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Label Meaning
W1(E1: 14) The 1st4th channels of E1 signals
W2(E1: 58) The 5th8th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment
Table 516 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from
AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.


5-26
Note:
jacket.
The meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows:

DDF
X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
38 Ring
23 Tip
1 R1
37 Ring
22 Tip
3 R2
36 Ring
21 Tip
5 R3
35 Ring
20 Tip
7 R4
15 Ring
30 Tip
2 T1
14 Ring
29 Tip
4 T2
13 Ring
28 Tip
6 T3
12 Ring
27 Tip
8 T4
34 Ring
19 Tip
1 R5
33 Ring
18 Tip
3 R6
32 Ring
17 Tip
5 R7
31 Ring 7 R8

5-27
X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship
16 Tip
11 Ring
26 Tip
2 T5
10 Ring
25 Tip
4 T6
9 Ring
24 Tip
6 T7
8 Ring
7 Tip
8 T8

I. Outline
Figure 510 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB
to DDF.
Label
Main label Twisted pair
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.15
Pos.31
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)

Figure 510 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Table 517 describes the labels on the E1 trunk cable.
AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF
Label Meaning
W1(Tx 18) Transmitting of the 1st8th channels of E1 signals
W2(Rx 18) Receiving of the 1st8th channels of E1 signals


5-28
II. Pin assignment
AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.

Note:

DDF
X Cable color Relationship R/T relationship
15 Blue
30 White
Twisted T1
14 Orange
29 White
Twisted T2
13 Green
28 White
Twisted T3
12 Brown
27 White
Twisted T4
11 Gray
26 White
Twisted T5
10 Blue
25 Red
Twisted T6
9 Orange
24 Red
Twisted T7
8 Green
7 Red
Twisted T8
38 Blue
23 White
Twisted R1
37 Orange
22 White
Twisted R2

5-29
X Cable color Relationship R/T relationship
36 Green
21 White
Twisted R3
35 Brown
20 White
Twisted R4
34 Gray
19 White
Twisted R5
33 Blue
18 Red
Twisted R6
32 Orange
17 Red
Twisted R7
31 Green
16 Red
Twisted R8

5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF
The rear-access E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF is the same as the
front-access E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.
Refer to "4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF".
5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
The E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro1000 has four types, as follows:
75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
Each type of the E1 trunk cable provides four E1 channels and four SHDSL channels.
The E1 branch of the E1 trunk cable connects to the Metro 1000, and the SHDSL
branch connects to the MDF.

5-30
5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
I. Outline
Figure 511 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Label
X1
Main label
X2
X
1 6
a
b
c
d
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair
Coaxial cable
Label

Figure 511 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
SS42SP1
Table 519 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000
SS42SP1
12E1 X1 The 1st2nd channels of E1 signals
34E1 X2 The 3rd4th channels of E1 signals
H521SDL Channel0 N/A The 1st channel of SHDSL signal
H521SDL Channel1 N/A The 2nd channel of SHDSL signal
H521SDL Channel2 N/A The 3rd channel of SHDSL signal
H521SDL Channel3 N/A The 4th channel of SHDSL signal

II. Pin assignment
Table 520 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to
Metro 1000 SS42SP1.


5-31
Note:
"SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket.
"*" after the color in the column "cable color" is the symbol on the cable.

Table 520 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro
1000 SS42SP1
X Cable color Relationship
28 Pink Red *
27 Pink Black *
Twisted
30 Brown Red *
29 Brown Black *
Twisted
32 Green Red *
31 Green Black *
Twisted
34 Blue Red *
33 Blue Black *
Twisted

X Coaxial cable & SN X1
36 Tip a6
35 Ring
1
a5
38 Tip d3
37 Ring
2
d4
40 Tip a4
39 Ring
3
a3
42 Tip d1
41 Ring
4
d2

44 Tip a6
43 Ring
5
a5
46 Tip d3
45 Ring
6
d4
48 Tip 7 a4

5-32
47 Ring a3
50 Tip d1
49 Ring
8
d2

I. Outline
Figure 512shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Label
X1
Main label
X2
X
1 6
a
b
c
d
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair
Coaxial cable
Label

SS42SP1
SS42SP1


5-33
II. Pin assignment
Table 522 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro
1000 SS42SP1.

Note:
In Table 522, "SN" in "Tip color and SN " refers to the label print on the cable jacket.
"*" after the color in the column "cable color" is the symbol on the cable.

1000 SS42SP1
28 Pink Red *
27 Pink Black *
Twisted
30 Brown Red *
29 Brown Black *
Twisted
32 Green Red *
31 Green Black *
Twisted
34 Blue Red *
33 Blue Black *
Twisted

X Tip color and SN X1
36 White a6
35 Blue
1
a5
38 White d3
37 Orange
2
d4
40 White a4
39 Green
3
a3
42 White d1
41 Brown
4
d2

44 White 5 a6

5-34
43 Gray a5
46 Red d3
45 Blue
6
d4
48 Red a4
47 Orange
7
a3
50 Red d1
49 Green
8
d2

I. Outline
1000 SS42SP2.
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Label
X1
Main label
X
1 6
a
b
c
d
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair
Coaxial cable
Label

SS42SP2
SS42SP2
14E1 X1 The 1st4th channels of E1 signals

5-35

II. Pin assignment
Table 524 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to
Metro 1000 SS42SP2.

Note:
jacket.
"*" after the color in the column "Cable color" is the symbol on the cable.

1000 SS42SP2
28 Pink Red *
27 Pink Black *
Twisted
30 Brown Red *
29 Brown Black *
Twisted
32 Green Red *
31 Green Black *
Twisted
34 Blue Red *
33 Blue Black *
Twisted

36 Tip b6
35 Ring
1
a6
38 Tip c6
37 Ring
2
d6
40 Tip a5
39 Ring
3
a4
42 Tip 4 d5

5-36
41 Ring d4
44 Tip a3
43 Ring
5
a2
46 Tip d3
45 Ring
6
d2
48 Tip a1
47 Ring
7
b1
50 Tip d1
49 Ring
8
c1

I. Outline
1000 SS42SP2.
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, female)
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Label
X1
Main label
X
1 6
a
b
c
d
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair
Coaxial cable
Label

SS42SP2
SS42SP2

5-37

II. Pin assignment
Table 526 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL
to Metro 1000 SS42SP2.

Note:
In Table 526, "SN" in "Tip color and No." refers to the label print on the cable jacket.
"*" after the color in the column "Cable color" is the symbol on the cable.

1000 SS42SP2
28 Pink Red *
27 Pink Black *
Twisted
30 Brown Red *
29 Brown Black *
Twisted
32 Green Red *
31 Green Black *
Twisted
34 Blue Red *
33 Blue Black *
Twisted

36 White b6
35 Blue
1
a6
38 White c6
37 Orange
2
d6
40 White 3 a5

5-38
39 Green a4
42 White d5
41 Brown
4
d4
44 White a3
43 Gray
5
a2
46 Red d3
45 Blue
6
d2
48 Red a1
47 Orange
7
b1
50 Red d1
49 Green
8
c1

5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable
I. Outline
Table 515 shows the outline of the IPMB service subtending cable.
Pos.68 Pos.34
Pos.35 Pos.1
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Main label
X
X1
X8
Label
Network port connector
(8-pin, female)
1
8

Figure 515 Outline of the IPMB service subtending cable
Table 527 describes the labels on the cable.
Table 527 Description of the labels on the IPMB service subtending cable
Label Meaning
LEFT 1# FE
The 1st channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the
frame (Front view of the frame)

5-39
Label Meaning
LEFT 2# FE
The 2nd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of
the frame (Front view of the frame)
LEFT 3# FE
The 3rd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of
LEFT 4# FE
The 4th channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the
frame (Front view of the frame)
RIGHT 1# FE
The 1st channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of
RIGHT 2# FE
The 2nd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of
RIGHT 3# FE
The 3rd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of
RIGHT 4# FE
The 4th channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of

II. Pin assignment
Table 528 shows the pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable.
Table 528 Pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable
X X1 Relationship
22 3
21 6
Twisted
20 1
19 2
Twisted

X X2 Relationship
26 3
25 6
Twisted
24 1
23 2
Twisted

X X3 Relationship
31 3
29 6
Twisted
28 1 Twisted

5-40
27 2

X X4 Relationship
34 3
33 6
Twisted
32 1
31 2
Twisted

X X5 Relationship
56 6
55 3
Twisted
54 2
53 1
Twisted

X X6 Relationship
60 6
59 3
Twisted
58 2
57 1
Twisted

X X7 Relationship
64 6
63 3
Twisted
62 2
61 1
Twisted

X X8 Relationship
68 6
67 3
Twisted
66 2
65 1
Twisted


5-41
5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable
The upstream cable of the IPMB card adopts a straight through cable.
5.2.24 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB
The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB has two types: 75-ohm
and 120-ohm. Each type provides eight E1 channels.
I. Outline
Table 516 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.
X3
D-type connector
(68-pin, Male)
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Label
X1
X2
Main label
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Coaxial cable
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31

APMB
Content Meaning
(18)E1 The 1st8th channels of E1 signals
(916)E1 The 9th16th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment


5-42
Note:
jacket.

26 51 Tip
11 49 Ring
1
19 48 Tip
34 47 Ring
2
25 46 Tip
10 45 Ring
3
18 44 Tip
33 43 Ring
4
24 52 Tip
9 41 Ring
5
17 41 Tip
32 39 Ring
6
7 38 Tip
8 37 Ring
7
16 36 Tip
31 35 Ring
8
30 34 Tip
15 33 Ring
1
23 32 Tip
38 31 Ring
2
29 30 Tip
14 29 Ring
3
22 28 Tip
37 27 Ring
4
28 26 Tip 5

5-43
13 25 Ring
21 24 Tip
36 23 Ring
6
27 22 Tip
12 21 Ring
7
20 20 Tip
35 19 Ring
8

15 68 Ring
30 67 Tip
1
38 66 Ring
23 65 Tip
2
14 64 Ring
29 63 Tip
3
37 62 Ring
22 61 Tip
4
13 61 Ring
28 59 Tip
5
36 58 Ring
21 57 Tip
6
12 56 Ring
27 55 Tip
7
35 54 Ring
20 53 Tip
8
11 16 Ring
26 15 Tip
1
34 14 Ring
19 13 Tip
2
10 12 Ring
25 11 Tip
3
33 11 Ring 4

5-44
18 9 Tip
9 8 Ring
24 7 Tip
5
32 6 Ring
17 5 Tip
6
8 4 Ring
7 3 Tip
7
31 2 Ring
16 1 Tip
8

I. Outline
Figure 517 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from
X3
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Label
X1
X2
Main label
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Twisted pair

APMB
Content Meaning
(18)E1 The 1st8th channels of E1 signals
(916)E1 The 9th16th channels of E1 signals


5-45
II. Pin assignment
X3 X1 Relationship
50 26
49 11
Twisted
48 19
47 34
Twisted
46 25
45 10
Twisted
44 18
43 33
Twisted
42 24
41 9
Twisted
40 17
39 32
Twisted
38 7
37 8
Twisted
36 16
35 31
Twisted
34 30
33 15
Twisted
32 23
31 38
Twisted
30 29
29 14
Twisted
28 22
27 37
Twisted
26 28
25 13
Twisted
24 21 Twisted

5-46
X3 X1 Relationship
23 36
22 27
21 12
Twisted
20 20
19 35
Twisted

X3 X2 Relationship
68 15
67 30
Twisted
66 38
65 23
Twisted
64 14
63 29
Twisted
62 37
61 22
Twisted
60 13
59 28
Twisted
58 36
57 21
Twisted
56 12
55 27
Twisted
54 35
53 20
Twisted
16 11
15 26
Twisted
14 34
13 19
Twisted
12 10
11 25
Twisted
10 33
9 18
Twisted
8 9 Twisted

5-47
X3 X2 Relationship
7 24
6 32
5 17
Twisted
4 8
3 7
Twisted
2 31
1 16
Twisted

5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF
The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF has two types: 75-ohm
and 120-ohm. Each type provides eight E1 channels.
The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF is the same as the E1
trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.
5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000
The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 has four types, each of
which provides 16 E1 channels.
5.2.29 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000
SS42SP1
I. Outline

5-48
1 6
a
b
c
d
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, male)
D-type connector
(44-pins, male)
Coaxial cable
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
Label
Main label
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31

Metro 1000 SS42SP1
Table 533 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP1
56E1 X4 The 5th6th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment

Note:
jacket.


5-49
Table 534 Pin assignment of the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1
38 a5 Ring
23 a6 Tip
1
15 d4 Ring
30 d3 Tip
2
37 a3 Ring
22 a4 Tip
3
14 d2 Ring
29 d1 Tip
4

36 a5 Ring
21 a6 Tip
5
13 d4 Ring
28 d3 Tip
6
35 a3 Ring
20 a4 Tip
7
12 d2 Ring
27 d1 Tip
8

34 a5 Ring
19 a6 Tip
1
11 d4 Ring
26 d3 Tip
2
33 a3 Ring
18 a4 Tip
3
10 d2 Ring
25 d1 Tip
4


5-50
32 a5 Ring
17 a6 Tip
5
9 d4 Ring
24 d3 Tip
6
31 a3 Ring
16 a4 Tip
7
8 d2 Ring
7 d1 Tip
8

SS42SP1
I. Outline
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Main label
1 6
a
b
c
d
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, male)
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
Label
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31
Coaxial cable

Metro 1000 SS42SP1
Table 535 Labels on the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP1
Label Contents Meaning

5-51

II. Pin assignment
38 a5
23 a6
Twisted
15 d4
30 d3
Twisted
37 a3
22 a4
Twisted
14 d2
29 d1
Twisted

36 a5
21 a6
Twisted
13 d4
28 d3
Twisted
35 a3
20 a4
Twisted
12 d2
27 d1
Twisted

34 a5
19 a6
Twisted

5-52
11 d4
26 d3
Twisted
33 a3
18 a4
Twisted
10 d2
25 d1
Twisted

32 a5
17 a6
Twisted
9 d4
24 d3
Twisted
31 a3
16 a4
Twisted
8 d2
7 d1
Twisted

SS42SP2
I. Outline
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Main label
1 6
a
b
c
d
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, male)
X1
X2
X3
Label
Coaxial cable

Metro 1000 SS42SP2

5-53
Table 537 Labels on the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP2

II. Pin assignment

Note:
jacket.

38 a6 Ring
23 b6 Tip
1
15 d6 Ring
30 c6 Tip
2
37 a4 Ring
22 a5 Tip
3
14 d4 Ring
29 d5 Tip
4

36 a2 Ring
21 a3 Tip
5
13 d2 Ring
28 d3 Tip
6
35 b1 Ring 7

5-54
20 a1 Tip
12 c1 Ring
27 d1 Tip
8

34 a6 Ring
19 b6 Tip
1
11 d6 Ring
26 c6 Tip
2
33 a4 Ring
18 a5 Tip
3
10 d4 Ring
25 d5 Tip
4

32 a2 Ring
17 a3 Tip
5
9 d2 Ring
24 d3 Tip
6
31 b1 Ring
16 a1 Tip
7
8 c1 Ring
7 d1 Tip
8

SS42SP2
I. Outline

5-55
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Main label
1 6
a
b
c
d
Wire connector
(4 x 6-pin, male)
X1
X2
X3
Twisted pair
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31
Label

Figure 521 Outline of the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP2
Table 539 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro 1000 SS42SP2

II. Pin assignment
38 a6
23 b6
Twisted
15 d6
30 c6
Twisted
37 a4
22 a5
Twisted
14 d4
29 d5
Twisted

5-56
36 a2
21 a3
Twisted
13 d2
28 d3
Twisted
35 b1
20 a1
Twisted
12 c1
24 d1
Twisted

34 a6
19 b6
Twisted
11 d6
26 c6
Twisted
33 a4
18 a5
Twisted
10 d4
25 d5
Twisted
32 a2
17 a3
Twisted
9 d2
24 d3
Twisted
31 b1
16 a1
Twisted
8 c1
7 d1
Twisted

5.2.33 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to
Metro100
The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 has two types:
75-ohm and 120-ohm.

5-57
5.2.34 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100
I. Outline
Main label
Label
X1
X2
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.31
Pos.16
Pos.30
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.31
Pos.30
Pos.16
Pos.44
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Coaxial cable

Metro100
Table 541 describes the labels on this trunk cable.
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100
PVU8/PVU4 X1
Connector X1 is connected to
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4.

II. Pin assignment

Note:
jacket.

PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100

5-58
38 15 Ring
23 30 Tip
1
37 14 Ring
22 29 Tip
3
36 13 Ring
21 28 Tip
5
35 12 Ring
20 27 Tip
7
15 38 Ring
30 23 Tip
2
14 37 Ring
29 22 Tip
4
13 36 Ring
28 21 Tip
6
12 35 Ring
27 20 Tip
8

34 11 Ring
19 26 Tip
1
33 10 Ring
18 25 Tip
3
32 9 Ring
17 24 Tip
5
31 8 Ring
16 7 Tip
7
11 34 Ring
26 19 Tip
2
10 33 Ring
25 18 Tip
4
9 32 Ring
24 17 Tip
6

5-59
8 31 Ring
7 16 Tip
8

5.2.35 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100
I. Outline
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
D-type connector
(44-pin, male)
Label
Main label
X1
X2
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31
Pos.44
Pos.1 Pos.15
Pos.30 Pos.16
Pos.31

Metro100
Table 543 Description of labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100
PVU8/PVU4 X1
Connector X1 is connected to
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4.

II. Pin assignment
PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100

5-60
38 15
23 30
Twisted
37 14
22 29
Twisted
36 13
21 28
Twisted
35 12
20 27
Twisted
15 38
30 23
Twisted
14 37
29 22
Twisted
13 36
28 21
Twisted
12 35
27 20
Twisted

34 11
19 26
Twisted
33 10
18 25
Twisted
32 9
17 24
Twisted
31 8
16 7
Twisted
11 34
26 19
Twisted
10 33
25 18
Twisted
9 32
24 17
Twisted

5-61
8 31
7 16
Twisted

5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable
The rear-access subtending cable of the UA5000 includes the following two types:
HW cable
Slave frame LVDS cable
5.3.1 HW Cable
I. Outline
Figure 524 shows the outline of the HW cable.
Main label
Twisted pair
Pos.1
Pos.36 Pos.18
Pos.19
D-type connector
(36-pin, male)
Pos.1
Pos.36 Pos.18
Pos.19
D-type connector
(36-pin, male)

Figure 524 Outline of the HW cable
II. Pin assignment
Table 545 shows the pin assignment of the HW cable.
Table 545 Pin assignment of the HW cable
X1 X2 Relationship
1 1
2 2
Twisted
3 3
4 4
Twisted
5 5
6 6
Twisted
7 7
8 8
Twisted

5-62
X1 X2 Relationship
9 9
10 10
Twisted
11 11
12 12
Twisted
13 13
14 14
Twisted
15 15
16 16
Twisted
19 19
20 20
Twisted
21 21
22 22
Twisted
23 23
24 24
Twisted
25 25
26 26
Twisted
29 29
30 30
Twisted
32 32
33 33
Twisted
34 34 -
18 18
36 36
Twisted

5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame
I. Outline
Figure 525 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.

5-63
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35
Main label
X1
X2
Twisted pair
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)

Figure 525 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame
II. Pin assignment
Table 546 shows the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.
Table 546 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame
X1 X2 Grounded or not Relationship
3 3 Yes
1 1
2 2
No
Twisted
5 5 Yes
6 6
7 7
No
Twisted
9 9 Yes
10 10
11 11
No
Twisted
12 12 Yes
13 13
14 14
No
Twisted
18 18 Yes
19 37
20 38
No
Twisted
24 24 Yes
25 43
26 44
No
Twisted
30 30 Yes
31 50
32 51
No
Twisted

5-64
X1 X2 Grounded or not Relationship
36 36 Yes
37 19
38 20
No
Twisted
42 42 Yes
43 25
44 26
No
Twisted
45 45 Yes
46 46
47 47
No
Twisted
49 49 Yes
50 31
51 32
No
Twisted
55 55 Yes
56 56
57 57
No
Twisted
61 61 Yes
62 62
63 63
No
Twisted
66 66 Yes
67 67
68 68
No
Twisted
40 41
41 40
No Twisted
39 39 Yes NA

5.4 Subscriber Cable
5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable
The rear-access subscriber cable of the UA5000 includes the following types:
16-port subscriber cable
32-port subscriber cable
ATIA subscriber cable

5-65
EAUA subscriber cable
SDLT subscriber cable
5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 526 shows the outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.
X4
X3
X2
X1
Twisted pair
Wire connector
(3 x 8-pin, female)
1
8
a c b

Figure 526 Outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.
II. Pin assignment
Table 547 shows the pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.

Note:
"*" and "" are the symbols on the cable. "Continuous" after the color means the
symbols are continuous.

Table 547 Pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable
X1 Tip color Symbol color
a1 Red*
c1
Pink
Black*
a2 Orange Red*

5-66
c2 Black*
a3 Red*
c3
Green
Black*
a4 Red*
c4
Blue
Black*
a5 Red*
c5
Gray
Black*
a6 Red**
c6
Pink
Black**
a7 Red**
c7
Orange
Black**
a8 Red**
c8
Green
Black**

a1 Red**
c1
Blue
Black**
a2 Red**
c2
Gray
Black**
a3 Red***
c3
Pink
Black***
a4 Red***
c4
Orange
Black***
a5 Red***
c5
Green
Black***
a6 Red***
c6
Blue
Black***
a7 Red***
c7
Gray
Black***
a8 Red****
c8
Pink
Black****


5-67
a1 Red****
c1
Orange
Black****
a2 Red****
c2
Green
Black****
a3 Red****
c3
Blue
Black****
a4 Red****
c4
Gray
Black****
a5 Red*(continuous)
c5
Pink
Black*(continuous)
a6 Red*(continuous)
c6
Orange
Black*(continuous)
a7 Red*(continuous)
c7
Green
Black*(continuous)
a8 Red*(continuous)
c8
Blue
Black*(continuous)

a1 Red*(continuous)
c1
Gray
Black*(continuous)
a2 Red
c2
Pink
Black
a3 Red
c3
Orange
Black
a4 Red
c4
Green
Black
a5 Red
c5
Blue
Black
a6 Red
c6
Gray
Black
a7 Red
c7
Pink
Black

5-68
a8 Red
c8
Blue
Black

5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 527 shows the outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.
X1
X2
16
abc
1
Wire connector
(3 x 16-pin, female)
Main label
Twisted pair

Figure 527 Outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.
Table 548 Description of the labels on the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable
UP (116) X1
The first 16 subscriber ports, connected
to the upper HEADER on the backplane.
DOWN (1732) X2
The last 16 subscriber ports, connected
to the upper HEADER on the backplane.

II. Pin assignment
Table 549 shows the pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.


5-69
Note:
"*" and "" are the symbols on the cable. "Continuous" after the color means the
symbols are continuous.

Table 549 Pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable
a1 Red*
c1
Pink
Black*
a2 Red*
c2
Orange
Black*
a3 Red*
c3
Green
Black*
a4 Red*
c4
Blue
Black*
a5 Red*
c5
Gray
Black*
a6 Red**
c6
Pink
Black**
a7 Red**
c7
Orange
Black**
a8 Red**
c8
Green
Black**
b1 Red**
b2
Blue
Black**
b3 Red**
b4
Gray
Black**
b5 Red***
b6
Pink
Black***
b7 Red***
b8
Orange
Black***
b9 Red***
B1
Green
Black***

5-70
b11 Red***
b12
Blue
Black***
b13 Red***
b14
Gray
Black***
b15 Red****
b16
Pink
Black****

b1 Red****
b2
Orange
Black****
b3 Red****
b4
Green
Black****
b5 Red****
b6
Blue
Black****
b7 Red****
b8
Gray
Black****
b9 Red*(continuous)
b10
Pink
Black*(continuous)
b11 Red*(continuous)
b12
Orange
Black*(continuous)
b14
Green
Black*(continuous)
b16
Blue
Black*(continuous)
a9 Red*(continuous)
c9
Gray
Black*(continuous)
a10 Red
c10
Pink
Black
a11 Red
c11
Orange
Black
a12 Red
c12
Green
Black

5-71
a13 Red
c13
Blue
Black
a14 Red
c14
Gray
Black
a15 Red
c15
Pink
Black
a16 Red
c16
Blue
Black

5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 528 shows the outline of the ATIA subscriber cable.
1
8
a c b
X2
X1
Wire connector
(3 x 8-pin, female)
Main label
Twisted pair

Figure 528 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable
Table 550 describes the labels on the ATIA subscriber cable.
Table 550 Description of labels on the ATIA subscriber cable
JP2(18) X1
Connected to pin rows 18 on the upper header
in the cabling area of the corresponding card
JP3(2532) X2
Connected to pin rows 2532 on the lower
header in the cabling area of the corresponding
card


5-72
II. Pin assignment
Table 551 shows the pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable.
Table 551 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable
Connector X1 Tip color Tip point color
a1 Red*
a2
Pink
Black*
a3 Red*
a4
Orange
Black*
a5 Red*
a6
Green
Black*
a7 Red*
a8
Blue
Black*

b1 Red**
b2
Pink
Black**
b3 Red**
b4
Orange
Black**
b5 Red**
b6
Green
Black**
b7 Red**
b8
Blue
Black**

c1 Red***
c2
Pink
Black***
c3 Red***
c4
Orange
Black***
c5 Red***
c6
Green
Black***
c7 Red***
c8
Blue
Black***

5-73

a1 Red****
a2
Pink
Black****
a3 Red****
a4
Orange
Black****
a5 Red****
a6
Green
Black****
a7 Red****
a8
Blue
Black****

b1 Red*****
b2
Pink
Black*****
b3 Red*****
b4
Orange
Black*****
b5 Red*****
b6
Green
Black*****
b7 Red*****
b8
Blue
Black*****

c1 Red-
c2
Pink
Black-
c3 Red-
c4
Orange
Black-
c5 Red-
c6
Green
Black-
c7 Red-
c8
Blue
Black-


5-74
5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 529 shows the outline of the EAUA subscriber cable.
X7
X5
X3
X1
X8
X6
X4
X2
Network port
connector (8-pin)
Main label
X
8 1
D-type connector
(68-pin, male)
Pos.68
Pos.1
Pos.34
Pos.35

Figure 529 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable
Table 552 Description of the labels on the EAUA subscriber cable
Content Connector Meaning
channel1 X1 The 1st subscriber port
channel2 X2 The 2nd subscriber port
channel3 X3 The 3rd subscriber port
channel4 X4 The 4th subscriber port

II. Pin assignment
Table 553 shows the pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.

5-75
Table 553 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable
X X1 Cable color Relationship
36 1 White
35 2 Black
Twisted
38 3 White
37 6 Brown
Twisted

40 1 White
39 2 Black
Twisted
42 3 White
41 6 Brown
Twisted

44 1 White
43 2 Black
Twisted
46 3 White
45 6 Brown
Twisted

48 1 White
47 2 Black
Twisted
50 3 White
49 6 Brown
Twisted

20 1 White
19 2 Black
Twisted
22 3 White
21 6 Brown
Twisted


5-76
24 1 White
23 2 Black
Twisted
26 3 White
25 6 Brown
Twisted

28 1 White
27 2 Black
Twisted
30 3 White
29 6 Brown
Twisted

32 1 White
31 2 Black
Twisted
34 3 White
33 6 Brown
Twisted

5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable
The SDLT subscriber cable has two types: with four tributaries and with eight
tributaries. They are used to connect four and eight SHDSL channels respectively.
5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 530 shows the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

5-77
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
8 1
Main label
8-pin network port
connector
Wire connector
(3 x 8-pin, female)
a
1
b c
8
Label

Figure 530 Outline of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
Table 554 describes the labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.
Table 554 Description of labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
RPS SDLT
DOWN(1732)
X1
Connector X1 is connected to pin
rows 1732 on the lower header of
the backplane.
1#RPS X2 The 1st channel of SHDSL signals.
2#RPS X3 The 2nd channel of SHDSL signals.
3#RPS X4 The 3rd channel of SHDSL signals.
4#RPS X5 The 4th channel of SHDSL signals.

II. Pin assignment
Table 555 shows the pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.
Table 555 Pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
a1 7
c1 8
Twisted
a2 5
c2 6
Twisted

a3 7 Twisted

5-78
c3 8
a4 5
c4 6
Twisted

a5 7
c5 8
Twisted
a6 5
c6 6
Twisted

a7 7
c7 8
Twisted
a8 5
c8 6
Twisted

5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable
I. Outline
Figure 531 shows the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.
X1
X2
X3
X9
8 1
Main label
8-pin network
port connector
Wire connector
(3 x 8-pin, female)
a
1
b c
8
Label

Figure 531 Outline of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
Table 556 describes the labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

5-79
Table 556 Description of labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
RPS SDLT
DOWN(1732)
X1
Connector X1 is connected to pin
rows 1732 on the lower header of
the backplane.
1#RPS X2
The 1st channel of SHDSL
signals.
2#RPS X3
The 2nd channel of SHDSL
signals.
3#RPS X4
The 3rd channel of SHDSL
signals.
4#RPS X5
The 4th channel of SHDSL
signals.
5#RPS X6
signals.
6#RPS X7
signals.
7#RPS X8
signals.
8#RPS X9
signals.

II. Pin assignment
Table 557 shows the pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.
Table 557 Pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable
a1 7
c1 8
Twisted

a2 7
c2 8
Twisted

a3 7
c3 8
Twisted

5-80

a4 7
c4 8
Twisted

a5 7
c5 8
Twisted

a6 7
c6 8
Twisted

a7 7
c7 8
Twisted

a8 7
c8 8
Twisted

5.5 Maintenance Cable
The rear-access cable of the UA5000 is the same as the front-accessible cable. Refer
to "Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables".
5.6 Overview of Signal Cable
The rear-access signal cables of the UA5000 include:
ESC monitoring cable
Test and alarm cable
Fan monitoring cable

5-81
5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable
I. Outline
Figure 532shows the outline of the ESC monitoring cable.
Network port
connector (8-pin) Label Main label Twisted pair
8 1
8 1
X1
X2
X3

Figure 532 Outline of the ESC monitoring cable
Table 558 describes the labels on the ESC monitoring cable.
Table 558 Description of the labels on the ESC monitoring cable
JD3/JD4 X1
Connected to JD3 or JD4 on the service frame
where the control card resides.
ESC-A X2
Connected to JC1 of the environment
monitoring unit.
ESC-B X3
Connected to JC3 of the environment
monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment
Table 559 shows the pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable.
Table 559 Pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable
X1 X2 Cable color
3 7 White
6 6 Blue
7 3 White

X1 X3 Cable color
8 7 White
2 6 Blue
1 3 White


5-82
5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable
The test and alarm cable adopts the straight through cable.
5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable
I. Outline
Figure 533 shows the outline of the fan monitoring cable.
Network port
connector (8-pin)
4-pin connector
Label
8 1
X1
Main label
Twisted pair
X2
X3
1
4

Figure 533 Outline of the fan monitoring cable
Table 560 describes the labels on the fan monitoring cable.
Table 560 Description of the labels on the fan monitoring cable
Up fan X3
Connected to the fan monitoring interface on
the upper frame.
Down fan X2
Connected to the fan monitoring interface on
the lower frame.

II. Pin assignment
Table 561 shows the pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable.
Table 561 Pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable
From To Relationship
X1.1 X2.2
X1.2 X2.3
Twisted
X1.3 X3.2
X1.6 X3.3
Twisted

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A-1
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
ASL Analog Subscriber Line Card
ATIA Analog Trunk Interface
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BRA Basic Rate Access
C
CDI Direct-Dialing-In Subscriber Interface Card
CES Circuit Emulation Service
CLK Clock
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
D
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Communications Equipment
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
DSL 8-Port Remote Feeding Digital Subscriber Line Card
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
E
ESC Environment & Power Monitoring Card
F
FC Fiber Connector
FE Far End, Fast Ethernet
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet

A-2
GND Ground
H
HONET Home Optical Network
HSL High-speed Subscriber Line Card
HW Highway
I
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

L
LAN Local Area Network
LE Local Exchange
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal
M
MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol
MSTP Multi-Service Transmission Platform
MTA Multifunctional Terminal Adapter
N
NGN Next Generation Network
NMS Network Management System
NOD Node Communication Card
O
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OLT Optical Line Terminal
ONU Optical Network Unit
P
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PWX Secondary Power Supply Card
Q
QoS Quality of Service
R
RSP Remote Subscriber Processor

A-3
S
SHDSL Single-pair High Rate Digital Subscriber Line
SPC Semi-Permanent Connection
STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module-1
STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module-4
STP Shielded Twisted Pair
STU SHDSL Transceiver Unit
T
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TSSB Test Card
U
UNI User Network Interface
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
V
VDSL Very High Speed DSL
VFB Voice Frequency Card
VoIP Voice over IP
VP Virtual Path
X
xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Index

1
Index
Numerics
120-ohm matching impedance, 3-22, 3-28, 3-34,
3-40, 3-54, 3-112, 4-17, 4-46, 5-10, 5-29, 5-47
16-channel unshielded subscriber cable, 4-53
32-channel unshielded subscriber cable, 4-55
75-ohm matching impedance, 3-22, 3-28, 3-34,
3-40, 3-54, 3-112, 4-17, 4-46, 5-10, 5-29, 5-47
A
ADSL line card, 3-56
H601ADLB, 3-56
H601ADLF, 3-59
AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB, 3-18
analog line card, 3-78
CB36ASL/CB37ASL, 3-72
CB38ASL, 3-75
CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL, 3-78
CC0KASL/CC0MASL, 3-81
C
CB01VMS, 3-155
CB02DSL/CB03DSL, 3-114
CB02VFB, 3-147
CB03VFB, 3-151
CB05DSL, 3-117
conversion card, 3-194
H601SLTF, 3-203
D
digital trunk cable, 4-1
DTE, 4-64
E
EAUA subscriber cable, 4-61
environment & power monitoring card, 3-158
H303ESC, 3-158
H304ESC, 3-161
F
F01A, 1-2
F01AF, 1-2
F01D100, 1-2
F01D1000, 1-2
F01D200, 1-2
F01D500, 1-2
F02A, 1-2
F02AF, 1-2
FC/PC optical connector, 4-73
fiber selection criteria, 4-72
front access, 1-2
H
H301CDI/CC01CDI, 3-90
H302HSL, 3-123
H521SDL, 3-132
H601ADRB, 3-68
H601AIUB, 3-45
H601APMB, 3-1
H601APSB, 3-11
H601ATIA, 3-84
H601CSLB, 3-93
H601CSLI, 3-96
H601DEHA, 3-109
H601E1TB, 3-181
H601E1TF, 3-184
H601EAUA, 3-120
H601EDTB, 3-50
H601EFTB, 3-185
H601EFTF, 3-188
H601FCB, 3-164
H601HLAF, 3-190
H601HLEF, 3-191
H601HLSF, 3-192

2
H601HWCB, 3-192
H601HWCF, 3-194
H601HWTB, 3-195
H601HWTF, 3-196
H601IPMB, 3-13
H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PV
MBG, 3-23
H601PVU8/H601PVU4, 3-29
H601RATB, 3-197
H601RATF, 3-200
H601RSU8/H601RSU4, 3-35
H601SDLB, 3-138
H601SDLT, 3-140
H601TSSB/H601TSSC, 3-175
H601VDLA, 3-143
H601VDLB, 3-145
H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI, 3-62
H602CSMB, 3-99
H602RSUG, 3-41
H603ADRB, 3-64
H603CSMB/H603CSMC, 3-102
H603CSRB, 3-106
HABA
external port, 2-3
layout, 2-1
power supply port, 2-4
HABA frame, 2-1
HABB
external port, 2-6
layout, 2-5
HABB frame, 2-4
HABD
external port, 2-9
layout, 2-8
HABD frame, 2-7
HABE
external port, 2-13
layout, 2-12
HABE frame, 2-12
HABF
external port, 2-16
layout, 2-15
HABF frame, 2-15
HABL
external port, 2-20
layout, 2-19
HABL frame, 2-18
high speed line card, 3-123
H303HSL, 3-127
HW cable, 4-47
L
LC/PC optical connector, 4-73
LVDS cable
extended frame, 4-50
slave frame, 4-48
M
MTRJ optical connector, 4-73
N
network cable, 4-64
O
optical fiber, 4-70
optical fiber types, 4-70
optical port connectors, 4-73
R
rear access, 1-2
S
SC/PC optical connector, 4-73
secondary power supply card, 3-168
H602PWX0, 3-168
H602PWX2, 3-171
signal cable, 4-66
ST/PC optical connector, 4-73
subscriber cable, 4-53

3
subtending cable, 4-47
T
test and alarm cable, 4-66
test and alarm subtending cable, 4-69
U
UA5000 series, 1-1

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1 .........................................................................................

1.1 About the UA5000 1-1 ..................................................................................

Potrebbero piacerti anche